JP6481151B1 - Amusement stand - Google Patents

Abstract

A game machine with improved information display is provided.
A slot machine 100 displays (1) an operation specific image d10 when an internal winning combination is given to an operation order in an effect state 1 or 2, and (2) in the final game in the effect state 1, the first movement In the final game in the production state 2, the insertion image d30 that enlarges the display area by performing a second movement larger than the first movement is displayed. 3) When an internal winning is made in the operation order combination in the final game in the production state 1, the insertion specific image d10 to be enlarged and displayed is enlarged and the operation specific image d10 to be enlarged is displayed, while in the final game in the production state 2 When the operation order combination is internally won, the operation specific image d10 to be enlarged is displayed while the insertion image d30 to be moved second is enlarged.
[Selection] Figure 44

Description

  The present invention relates to a game machine represented by a slot machine (cylinder game machine) and a pachinko machine (ball ball game machine).

  Conventionally, for example, a slot machine is known as one of game machines. In this slot machine, when the reel is rotated by inserting a medal and operating the start lever, the role is determined internally by internal lottery, and the reel is stopped by operating the stop button. When a combination of symbols predetermined according to the internal determination is displayed, a combination is established. When a winning combination with payout of medals is established, a prescribed number of medals corresponding to the established winning combination are paid out.

  As such a game machine, there is a game machine that displays information related to the operation of a stop button for deriving a stop mode advantageous to the player (for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent No. 5682922 (FIG. 8 etc.)

  However, there is still room for improvement in the display of information related to the operation of the stop button described above.

  The present invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a game machine with improved information display.

In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to the present invention, as one aspect thereof, is provided with a plurality of types of symbols and is operated to start rotation of three reels that are rotationally driven and the three reels. a start operation means that, provided corresponding to each of the three reels, and three stop operation means which is operated to the three rotating reel individually stopped, the image display area An image display means for displaying an image, wherein the image display means is a means for displaying a notification image indicating a stop operation order of the three stop operation means in the image display area. The notification image indicates a first stop operation notification image indicating the first stop operation means operated, a second stop operation notification image indicating the second stop operation means, and a stop operation means operated last. Third stop operation notification screen When, an image composed of the image display means is means for displaying the background image on the image display area, the image display means is means for displaying the inserted image in the image display area, the image The display means is means for enlarging a display area of the insertion image in order to reduce a display area of the background image when displaying the insertion image while displaying a background image in the image display area. image comprises a first insertion image that the first movement of, and a second insertion image that allows a large second movement than the movement of the first, the image display means, first In the production state , the first insertion image is displayed in the image display area, while in the second production state , the second insertion image is displayed in the image display area . The first performance When the first insertion image is displayed in the image display area and the notification image is displayed, the first insertion image and the notification image are displayed separately after an operation on the start operation means. However, the first insertion image is displayed so as not to overlap any of the first stop operation notification image, the second stop operation notification image, and the third stop operation notification image (hereinafter referred to as a first display mode). And when the operation of the stop operation means indicated by the first stop operation notification image is performed when the first display mode is displayed, the first stop operation notification image is deleted, and the notification image Among them, the second stop operation notification image and the third stop operation report are enlarged, the first insertion image is enlarged, and the enlarged first insertion image is enlarged. The display is performed so as not to overlap any of the knowledge images (hereinafter referred to as a second display mode), and when there is a display of the second display mode, an operation is performed on the stop operation means indicated by the second stop operation notification image. The second stop operation notification image is erased, the third stop operation notification image is enlarged among the notification images, the first insertion image is enlarged, and the enlarged first insertion image is expanded Is a means for displaying the image so as not to overlap the enlarged third stop operation notification image (hereinafter referred to as a third display mode), and the first insertion image and the second stop in the second display mode. The interval with the operation notification image is an interval narrower than the interval between the first insertion image and the first stop operation notification image in the first display mode, and the first display mode in the third display mode Inserted image and previous The interval between the third stop operation notification images is smaller than the interval between the first insertion image and the second stop operation notification image in the second display mode, and the image display means When the second insertion image is displayed in the image display area and the notification image is displayed in the effect state, the second insertion image and the notification image are separated from each other after an operation on the start operation means. The second insertion image is displayed so as not to overlap any of the first stop operation notification image, the second stop operation notification image, and the third stop operation notification image (hereinafter referred to as a fourth display). And when the operation of the stop operation means indicated by the first stop operation notification image is performed in the presence of the display of the fourth display mode, the first stop operation notification image is deleted, and the report Among the images, the second stop operation notification image is enlarged, the second insertion image is enlarged, and the enlarged second insertion image is enlarged, and the second stop operation notification image and the third stop operation are enlarged. The display is performed so as not to overlap any of the notification images (hereinafter referred to as the fifth display mode), and when there is a display of the fifth display mode, the operation for the stop operation means indicated by the second stop operation notification image is performed. The second stop operation notification image is erased, the third stop operation notification image is enlarged among the notification images, the second insertion image is enlarged, and the second insertion image is enlarged. Is displayed in a manner that does not overlap the enlarged third stop operation notification image (hereinafter referred to as a sixth display mode), and the second insertion image and the second stop in the fifth display mode Operation report The interval with the knowledge image is an interval narrower than the interval between the second insertion image and the first stop operation notification image in the fourth display mode, and the second insertion in the sixth display mode The interval between the image and the third stop operation notification image is narrower than the interval between the second insertion image and the second stop operation notification image in the fifth display mode .

  ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, the game stand which improved the information display can be provided.

FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing an appearance of the slot machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 3 is a front view showing the inside of the slot machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 3 is a circuit block diagram of a control unit of the slot machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a planar arrangement of symbols arranged on each reel of the slot machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing types of winning combinations (including actuating combinations), symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, the number of grants, and the like of the slot machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 10 is a game state transition diagram of the main control unit of the slot machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 10 shows a lottery table for winning combinations in each gaming state of the slot machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a time chart which shows the execution timing of the production | presentation of the slot machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the alerting | reporting aspect of the operation condition alerting | reporting effect of the slot machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the display mode of the operation correct image of the slot machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the alerting | reporting aspect of the operation condition alerting | reporting effect of the slot machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the alerting | reporting aspect of the state transition suggestion effect of the slot machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the display mode of the effect image display apparatus in case the operation condition alerting | reporting effect and a state transition suggestion effect are performed simultaneously in the slot machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the display mode of the effect image display apparatus in case the operation condition alerting | reporting effect and a state transition suggestion effect are performed simultaneously in the slot machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. 7 is a flowchart showing a main control unit main process flow of the slot machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. 4 is a flowchart showing a flow of main control unit timer interrupt processing of the slot machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows in detail the flow of the game state control process of step S111 of FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing a flow of a first sub control unit main process, a first sub control unit command reception interrupt process, and a first sub control unit timer interrupt process of the slot machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. The second sub control unit main process, the second sub control unit command reception interrupt process, the second sub control unit timer interrupt process, and the second sub control unit image control process of the slot machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention It is a flowchart which shows a flow. It is a flowchart which shows in detail the flow of the presentation control process of step S3005 of Fig.18 (a). FIG. 20 is a view showing a modified example of the operation correct image of the slot machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 20 is a view showing a modified example of the operation specifying image of the slot machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the modification of the state transition suggestion effect of the slot machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the modification of the operation condition alerting | reporting effect of the slot machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 20 is a view showing a modified example of the operation incorrect image of the slot machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the modification of the state transition suggestion effect of the slot machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the modification of the execution timing of the state transition suggestion effect of the slot machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the modification of the state transition suggestion effect of the slot machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the modification of the state transition suggestion effect and the operation condition alerting | reporting effect of the slot machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the alerting | reporting aspect of the operation condition alerting | reporting effect of the slot machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the change of the operation specific image of the slot machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the alerting | reporting aspect of the operation condition alerting | reporting effect of the slot machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the display mode of the effect image display apparatus in case the operation condition alerting | reporting effect and a state transition suggestion effect are performed simultaneously in the slot machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the modification of the display mode of the effect image display apparatus in case the operation condition alerting | reporting effect and a state transition suggestion effect are performed simultaneously in the slot machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the alerting | reporting aspect of the state transition suggestion effect of the slot machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention (modification). It is a figure explaining the display mode of the effect image display apparatus in case the operation condition alerting | reporting effect and a state transition suggestion effect are performed simultaneously in the slot machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention (modification example). It is a figure explaining the alerting | reporting aspect of the state transition suggestion effect of the slot machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention (modification). It is a figure explaining the alerting | reporting aspect of the state transition suggestion effect of the slot machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention (modification). It is a figure explaining the display mode of the effect image display apparatus in case the operation condition alerting | reporting effect and a state transition suggestion effect are performed simultaneously in the slot machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention (modification example). It is a figure explaining the alerting | reporting aspect of the state transition suggestion effect of the slot machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention (modification). It is a figure explaining the alerting | reporting aspect of the state transition suggestion effect of the slot machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention (modification). It is a figure explaining the alerting | reporting aspect of the operation condition alerting | reporting effect of the slot machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention (modification). It is a figure explaining the display mode of the effect image display apparatus in case the operation condition alerting | reporting effect and a state transition suggestion effect are performed simultaneously in the slot machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention (modification example). It is a figure explaining the display mode of the effect image display apparatus in case the operation condition alerting | reporting effect and a state transition suggestion effect are performed simultaneously in the slot machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention (modification example). It is a figure explaining the display mode of the effect image display apparatus in case the operation condition alerting | reporting effect and a state transition suggestion effect are performed simultaneously in the slot machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention (modification example). It is a figure explaining the display mode of the effect image display apparatus in case the operation condition alerting | reporting effect and a state transition suggestion effect are performed simultaneously in the slot machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention (modification example). It is a figure explaining the display mode of the effect image display apparatus in case the operation condition alerting | reporting effect and a state transition suggestion effect are performed simultaneously in the slot machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention (modification example). It is a table | surface explaining the kind of color of the insertion image displayed in the slot machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention, and the kind of operation specific image. It is a figure explaining the display mode of the effect image display apparatus in case the operation condition alerting | reporting effect and a state transition suggestion effect are performed simultaneously in the slot machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the display mode of the effect image display apparatus in case the operation condition alerting | reporting effect and a state transition suggestion effect are performed simultaneously in the slot machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view which shows the external appearance of the slot machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a front view of the state which opened the front door of the slot machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a circuit block diagram of the control part of the slot machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which expands and shows the arrangement of the design given to each reel of the slot machine concerning a 4th embodiment of the present invention planarly. It is a figure which shows the kind of winning combination (including an operating combination) of the slot machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention, the symbol combination corresponding to each winning combination, and the action | operation or payout of each winning combination. It is a transition diagram of the gaming state of the main control unit of the slot machine according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention. It is a schematic diagram of the prescribed number lottery table used for the prescribed number lottery of the slot machine according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention. It is a time chart which shows the operation | movement outline | summary of the navigation generation state 1 of the slot machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the alerting | reporting aspect of the operation navigation of the slot machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a time chart which shows the operation | movement outline | summary of the navigation generation state 1 of the slot machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a time chart which shows the lighting time of the navigation generation | occurrence | production state notification lamp of the slot machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the alerting | reporting aspect of the operation navigation of the slot machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a time chart when the navigation period of the slot machine according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention ends and when the navigation period continues. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part main process of the slot machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part timer interruption process of the slot machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing in detail a flow of a main control unit / operation navigation setting process in step S307 of FIG. 64. FIG. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing in detail a flow of a gaming state control process in step S312 of FIG. 64. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the 1st sub control part main process, the 1st sub control part command reception interruption process, and the 1st sub control part timer interruption process of the slot machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. The second sub control unit main process, the second sub control unit command reception interrupt process, the second sub control unit timer interrupt process, and the second sub control unit image control process of the slot machine according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention It is a flowchart which shows a flow. The figure which shows the combination of the small part 3 and the small part 4 of the slot machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention, the symbol combination corresponding to the small part 3 and the small part 4, the payout of the small part 3 and the small part 4, remarks. Yes (variation). It is a schematic diagram of the specified number of times lottery table used for the specified number of times lottery of the slot machine according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention (modified example). It is a time chart which shows the operation | movement outline | summary of the navigation generation state 1 of the slot machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention (modification). It is a time chart which shows the operation | movement outline | summary of the navigation generation state 1 of the slot machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention (modification). It is a time chart which shows the flow of the operation navigation in the navigation generation state 1 of the slot machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention, and the flow of a battle effect (modification). It is a time chart which shows the flow of the operation navigation in the navigation generation state 1 of the slot machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention, and the flow of a battle effect (modification). It is a time chart which shows the flow of the operation navigation in the navigation generation state 1 of the slot machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention, and the flow of a battle effect (modification). It is a time chart which shows the flow of the operation navigation in the navigation generation state 1 of the slot machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention, and the flow of a battle effect (modification). It is a time chart which shows the flow of the operation navigation in the navigation generation state 1 of the slot machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention, and the flow of a battle effect (modification). It is a time chart which shows the flow of the operation navigation in the navigation generation state 1 of the slot machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention, and the flow of a battle effect (modification). It is a time chart which shows the flow of the operation navigation in the navigation generation state 1 of the slot machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention, and the flow of a battle effect (modification). It is a time chart which shows the flow of the operation navigation in the navigation generation state 1 of the slot machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention, and the flow of a battle effect (modification). It is a time chart which shows the flow of the operation navigation in the navigation generation state 1 of the slot machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention, and the flow of a battle effect (modification). It is a time chart which shows the flow of the operation navigation in the navigation generation state 1 of the slot machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention, and the flow of a battle effect (modification). It is a time chart which shows the operation | movement outline | summary of the navigation generation state 1 of the slot machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention (modification).

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

  The slot machine described below starts rotating when a predetermined number of game media are inserted and a plurality of reels each having a plurality of types of symbols receive a predetermined rotation start instruction operation. Based on the reception of the rotation start instruction operation, whether or not the internal winning of a plurality of types of roles is determined by lottery, each of the plurality of reels individually stops rotation by receiving a predetermined rotation stop instruction operation, If the condition determined by the combination based on the result of the lottery and the combination of symbols when the reels are stopped matches a predetermined payout condition, the game medium is paid out and the game is ended. It is a game machine that advances a series of games that are terminated without being paid out.

  Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that performs so-called AT (assist time) gaming, in which information related to operation of a stop button for deriving a stopping mode advantageous to the player is notified. A game stand that performs AT games can provide an interesting game to a player without making the game operation monotonous.

  However, conventionally, since various displays are performed on a display device such as a liquid crystal display device, it may be difficult to grasp the content of information notification during an AT game.

  The gaming machine of this embodiment is a gaming machine that can clearly and quickly grasp the contents of information notification during an AT game.

[First Embodiment]
<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 1 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side).

  A slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 corresponds to an example of a game machine according to the present invention, and includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 that is attached to the front surface of the main body 101 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 101. . Inside the center of the main body 101 (not shown), three reels (left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112) having a plurality of types of symbols arranged on the outer peripheral surface are stored and rotated inside the slot machine 100. It is configured to be able to. These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

  In this embodiment, an appropriate number of symbols are printed on the belt-like member at equal intervals, and the reels 110 to 112 are configured by attaching the belt-like member to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member. When viewed from the player, the symbols on the reels 110 to 112 are displayed approximately three in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 113 provided in front of each reel 110 to 112 so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. Yes. Then, by rotating the reels 110 to 112, the combination of symbols that can be seen by the player varies. That is, each of the reels 110 to 112 functions as a display device that displays a plurality of combinations of symbols in a variable manner. In addition to the reel, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can also be used as such a display device. In this embodiment, three reels are provided in the center of the slot machine 100. However, the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

  Backlights (not shown) for illuminating individual symbols displayed on the symbol display window 113 are arranged on the rear surfaces of the reels 110 to 112. It is desirable that the backlight is shielded for each symbol so that the individual symbols can be illuminated evenly. In the slot machine 100, an optical sensor (not shown) including a light projecting unit and a light receiving unit is provided in the vicinity of each of the reels 110 to 112. The light projecting unit and the light receiving unit of the optical sensor are provided. A light shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the two. Based on the detection result of the sensor, the position of the symbol on the reel in the rotation direction is determined, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the winning line.

  The winning line display lamp 120 is a lamp indicating the winning line 114 that is valid. The effective pay line is determined in advance by the number of medals bet as a game medium. There are five pay lines 114. For example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal pay line is valid, and when two medals are betted, the upper horizontal win line and the lower horizontal pay line are added. If three are valid and three medals are bet, five lines including a right-down winning line and an upper-right winning line are valid as winning lines. The number of winning lines 114 is not limited to five. For example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line, the upper horizontal winning line, the lower horizontal winning line, the right The down line and the upper right line may be set as valid pay lines, and the same number of pay lines may be set as valid pay lines regardless of the number of bets.

  For example, the notification lamp 123 indicates that a specific winning combination (specifically, a special combination 1 and a special combination 2) is won internally in an internal lottery described later, or is in a special gaming state described later. It is a lamp to inform the person. The game medal insertable lamp 124 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert a game medal. The replay lamp 122 indicates that the current game can be replayed when a replaying role (details will be described later), which is one of the winning combinations in the previous game, can be replayed (no medal insertion is required). This is a lamp that informs the player. The reel panel lamp 128 is an effect lamp.

  The medal insertion buttons (also referred to as bet buttons) 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) stored electronically in the slot machine 100. In the present embodiment, each time the bet button 130 is pressed, one sheet is inserted. When the bet button 131 is pressed, two sheets are inserted. When the bet button 132 is pressed, three sheets are inserted. ing. Hereinafter, the bet button 132 is also referred to as a MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamp 129 lights up the number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when a prescribed number of medals are inserted, the game start is informed that the game can be started. The lamp 121 is turned on.

  The medal slot 141 is an slot for a player to insert a medal when starting a game. That is, the medal can be inserted electronically by the bet buttons 130 to 132, or an actual medal can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 141. is there.

  The stored number display 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals stored electronically in the slot machine 100. The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various types of internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) as numerical values. The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a winning combination. In the following, it may be expressed as being given to the player in the same meaning as being paid out to the player. The stored number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127 are 7-segment (SEG) displays.

  The start lever 135 is a lever type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 110 to 112. That is, when the desired medal number is inserted into the medal insertion slot 141 or when the bet buttons 130 to 132 are operated and the start lever 135 is operated, the reels 110 to 112 start to rotate. The operation on the start lever 135 is referred to as a game start operation.

  The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137 to 139 including a left stop button 137, a middle stop button 138, and a right stop button 139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started rotating by the operation of the start lever 135, and are associated with the reels 110 to 112. In this embodiment, the left reel 110 can be stopped by operating the left stop button 137, the middle reel 111 can be stopped by operating the middle stop button 138, and the right stop button 139 is operated. As a result, the right reel 112 can be stopped.

  Hereinafter, the operation on the stop buttons 137 to 139 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the last stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. Also, the reel that is the target of the first stop operation is referred to as the first stop reel, the reel that is the target of the second stop operation is the second stop reel, and the reel that is the target of the third stop operation is the third stop reel. Further, the order of stopping the stop buttons 137 to 139 in order to stop all the rotating reels 110 to 112 is called an operation order or a pressing order. The operation sequence of the stop operation with the first stop reel as the left reel 110 is called “forward press operation sequence” or simply “forward press”, and the operation sequence of the stop operation with the first stop reel as the middle reel 111 is “intermediate press operation”. The order of stop operation with the first stop reel as the right reel 112 is called “reverse push operation order” or simply “reverse push”. In the present embodiment, a light emitter is provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop button 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitter can be turned on to notify the player.

  The medal return button 133 is a button that is pressed to remove a medal when the inserted medal is jammed. The payment button 134 is a button for adjusting the medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and the bet medals and discharging them from the medal payout exit 155. The door key hole 140 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 is inserted.

  Below the stop button unit 136 is provided a title panel 162 for displaying the model name and pasting various types of certificate. At the lower part of the title panel 162, a medal payout opening 155 and a medal tray 161 are provided.

  The sound hole 181 is a hole for outputting the sound of a speaker provided inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. The side lamps 144 provided on the left and right portions of the front door 102 are decorative lamps for exciting games.

  An effect device 160 is disposed above the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is provided above the effect device 160. The effect device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 including two right shutters 163a and a left shutter 163b that can be opened and closed in a horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 157 (effect image) disposed on the back side of the shutter 163. And a display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 appears on the front side (player side) of the slot machine 100 when the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b are opened horizontally outward in front of the liquid crystal display device 157. It has become.

  The device for displaying an image is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be any display device that can display various effect images and various game information. For example, a multi-segment display (7-segment display), a dot matrix A display, an organic EL display, a plasma display, a reel (drum), or a display device including a projector and a screen may be used. Further, the display screen has a rectangular shape and is configured so that the player can visually recognize the entire display screen. In the case of this embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but may be square. In addition, a decorative object (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen, and a part of the peripheral edge of the display screen may be hidden by the decorative object, so that the display screen looks irregular. In the present embodiment, the display screen is a flat surface, but may be a curved surface.

<Internal configuration>
FIG. 2 is a view showing an internal configuration of the slot machine 100 and is a front view showing the slot machine 100 with the front door 102 opened.

  The main body 101 is a box body that is surrounded by an upper surface plate 261, a left side plate 260, a right side plate 260, a lower surface plate 264, and a back plate 242 and has an open front surface. Inside the main body 101, a main control board storage case 210 in which a main control board (a board on which a main control unit 300 to be described later is mounted) is stored in a position where it does not overlap with the ventilation port 249 provided on the upper part of the back plate 242. And three reels 110 to 112 are arranged below the main control board storage case 210. The side board 260 on the left side of the main control board storage case 210 and the reels 110 to 112 stores a first sub control board (a board on which a first sub control unit 400 to be described later is mounted) inside. A sub control board storage case 220 is disposed. Further, an external concentrated terminal plate 248 that is connected to the main control board and outputs the information of the slot machine 100 to an external device is attached to the side plate 260 on the right side.

  The lower surface plate 264 is provided with a medal payout device 180 (device for paying out medals accumulated in the bucket), and has a power supply board above the medal payout device 180, that is, below the reels 110 to 112. A power supply device 252 is disposed, and a power switch 282 is disposed on the front surface of the power supply device 252. The power supply device 252 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the slot machine 100 into a direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and supplies it to each control unit and each device such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400. Furthermore, a power storage circuit (for example, a capacitor) for supplying power to a predetermined part (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power source is cut off is provided. Yes.

  On the right side of the medal payout device 180, a medal auxiliary storage case 240 for storing medals overflowing from the medal payout device 180 is provided, and an overflow terminal is provided behind this (not shown). The power supply device 252 is provided with a power cord connecting portion for connecting a power cord 265, and the power cord 265 connected thereto extends to the outside through a power cord hole 262 provided in the back plate 242 of the housing 101. ing.

  The front door 102 is hinged to the left side plate 260 of the main body 101 via a hinge device 276, and an effect device 160 and a second control board (which controls the effect device 160) are provided above the symbol display window 113. Omission of illustration: a board on which a second sub-control unit 500 described later is mounted) and an upper speaker 272 are provided. Below the symbol display window 113 are provided a medal selector 170 for selecting inserted medals, a passage 266 through which the medal passes when the medal selector 170 drops an illegal medal or the like on the medal tray 161. ing. Further, a bass speaker 277 is provided at a position corresponding to the sound hole 181.

<Circuit configuration of control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

  The control unit of the slot machine 100 can be broadly divided into main effects according to a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. And a second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on a command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400.

<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, control program data, lottery data used in the internal lottery of a winning combination, and reel symbols. ROM 306 storing an array, RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, counter timer 312 for measuring time, frequency, etc., WDT (Watchdog timer) 314 is mounted. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Further, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits the frequency division data stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312. The counter timer 312 sets the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data. An interrupt request is transmitted to the CPU 304 at every interrupt time. In response to this interrupt request, the CPU 304 monitors each sensor and transmits a drive pulse. For example, when the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 315b is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the data for frequency division of the ROM 306 is set to 47, the interrupt reference time is 256 × 47 ÷ 8 MHz. = 1.504 ms.

  The main control unit 300 is activated when a power is turned on, and a random value generation circuit 316 used as a hardware random number counter that changes a numerical value in a range of 0 to 65535 based on a clock signal input from the crystal oscillator 315a. The CPU 304 includes a start signal output circuit 338 that outputs a signal (reset signal). When the start signal is input from the start signal output circuit 338, the CPU 304 starts game control (main control unit main processing described later) To start).

  Further, the main control unit 300 includes a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 inserts various sensors 318 (a bet button 130 sensor, a bet button 131 sensor, a bet button 132 sensor, and a medal insertion slot 141 every interruption time). Medal acceptance sensor, start lever 135 sensor, left stop button 137 sensor, middle stop button 138 sensor, right stop button 139 sensor, checkout button 134 sensor, medal payout sensor for medals paid out from the medal payout device 180, left reel 110 The index sensor of the middle reel 111, the index sensor of the right reel 112, etc.).

  When the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, a signal indicating this detection is output to the random value generation circuit 316. Receiving this signal, the random value generation circuit 316 latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register that stores the random value used for the lottery.

  Two medal acceptance sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal insertion slot 141 and detect whether or not a medal has passed. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135 and detect a start operation by the player. The left stop button 137 sensor, the middle stop button 138 sensor, and the right stop button 139 sensor are installed in the corresponding stop buttons 137 to 139, respectively, and detect the operation of the stop button by the player.

  The bet button 130 sensor, the bet button 131 sensor, and the bet button 132 sensor are installed in each of the corresponding medal insertion buttons 130 to 132, and the medal electronically stored in the RAM 308 is inserted into the game. Detecting a throwing operation when throwing as. The settlement button 134 sensor is provided on the settlement button 134. When the settlement button 134 is pressed once, the medals stored electronically are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting a medal paid out by the medal payout device 180. Each of the above sensors may be a non-contact type sensor or a contact type sensor.

  The index sensor of the left reel 110, the index sensor of the middle reel 111, and the index sensor of the right reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounting bases of the respective reels 110 to 112, and a light shielding piece provided on the reel frame passes therethrough. Each time you do it, it goes to L level. Rotational position information indicating how much the reel is rotating from the reference position from once to the L level is calculated based on the value obtained by counting the clock signals output from the crystal oscillator 315b. Is done. When the CPU 304 detects the L level signal, the CPU 304 determines that the reel has made one rotation and resets the rotational position information of the reel to zero. This rotational position information is stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300.

  The main control unit 300 is provided in a drive circuit 322 for driving a stepping motor provided on the reels 110 to 112, a drive circuit 324 for driving a solenoid provided in a medal selector 170 for selecting inserted medals, and a medal payout device 180. Drive circuit 326 for driving the motor, various lamps 336 (notification lamp 123, game medal insertion possible lamp 124, re-game lamp 122, game medal insertion lamp 129, game start lamp 121, stored number display 125, game information display 126, a driving circuit 328 for driving the payout number display device 127).

  In addition, an information output circuit 334 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is slotted into an information input circuit 652 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 334. The game information of the machine 100 (for example, information indicating the game state) is output.

  Further, the main control unit 300 includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power management unit (not shown) to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 330 is a voltage of the power source. When the value is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output to the basic circuit 302.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 400 and enables communication with the first sub control unit 400. Note that information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to transmit signals such as commands to the first sub control unit 400. However, the first sub-control unit 400 is configured not to transmit a signal such as a command to the main control unit 300.

<Sub control unit>
Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The first sub control unit 400 receives the control command transmitted from the main control unit 300 via the input interface. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on the control command. The basic circuit 402 stores data temporarily with the CPU 404. RAM 408, I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time and number of times are mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 stores a control program and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, a backlight lighting pattern, data for controlling various displays, and the like.

  The CPU 404 transmits the frequency division data stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency dividing data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the interrupt request timing.

  The first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a sound source IC 418, and the sound source IC 418 is provided with speakers 272 and 277 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls sound output from the amplifiers and speakers 272 and 277 in accordance with a command from the CPU 404. The sound source IC 418 is connected to an S-ROM (sound ROM) in which audio data is stored. The audio data acquired from the ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the speakers 272 and 277.

  Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a drive circuit 422, and various kinds of lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel 162 lamp, game medal are inserted into the drive circuit 422 through an input / output interface. Enable lamp 124, bet button lamp, reel backlight, stop button 137 to 139 lamp, etc.) are connected.

  Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a drive circuit 424 for driving the motor of the shutter 163, and the drive circuit 424 is provided with a shutter 163 via an output interface. The drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided in the shutter 163 in response to a command from the CPU 504.

  The first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a sensor circuit 426, and a shutter sensor 428 is connected to the sensor circuit 426 via an input interface. The CPU 504 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 428 every interruption time.

  In addition, the CPU 404 transmits and receives signals to the second sub control unit 500 via the output interface. The second sub control unit 500 performs display control of the effect image display device 157.

  Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 receives a control command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface, and includes a basic circuit 502 that controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter for measuring time, frequency, and the like. Timer 512 is mounted. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The ROM 506 stores a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for image display, and the like.

  The CPU 504 transmits the frequency division data stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the interrupt request timing.

  The second sub-control unit 500 is provided with a VDP 516 (video display processor), and a ROM 506 and a VRAM 518 are connected to the VDP 516 via a bus. The VDP 516 reads out image data and the like stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518, and displays the image on the effect image display device 157.

<Pattern arrangement>
Next, the symbol arrangement applied to each of the reels 110 to 112 will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the same figure is a figure which expand | deploys and shows the arrangement | sequence of the symbol given to each reel (left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112) planarly.

  A plurality of types (10 types in this embodiment) of symbols shown on the right side of the same figure are arranged on each reel 110 to 112 by a predetermined number of frames (21 frames of numbers 0 to 20 in this embodiment). Also, numbers 0 to 20 shown at the left end of the figure are numbers indicating the arrangement positions of symbols on the reels 110 to 112. For example, in the present embodiment, “watermelon symbol” is assigned to the frame number 19 on the left reel 110, “bell symbol” is assigned to the frame number 20 on the middle reel 111, and “seven 1” is assigned to the frame number 18 on the right reel 112. The “design” is arranged.

<Type of winning prize>
Next, the types of winning combinations of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure shows the types of winning combinations (including actuating combinations), symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and the operation or payout of each winning combination.

  The winning combination of the slot machine 100 includes a special combination (special combination 1, special combination 2) and a general combination (replay combination, small combination 1 to small combination 3). The types of winning combinations are not limited to these combinations and can be arbitrarily adopted.

  Among the winning combinations in this embodiment, the special combination 1 and the special combination 2 are combinations that shift to a special gaming state in which a predetermined profit is given to the player. In addition, the re-playing role is a role that enables re-playing without newly inserting medals. These winning combinations may be referred to as “acting combinations”. In addition, “winning” in the present embodiment includes a case where a symbol combination of an operating combination that does not accompany a medal payout (ie, does not accompany a medal payout) is displayed on the active line. Includes a special role 2 and a prize for replaying.

  The special combination 1 and the special combination 2 are combinations (operating combinations) that shift to a special gaming state by winning. However, medals will not be paid out for winning this role. In the corresponding symbol combination, the special role 1 is “Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1 (BB1)” or “Seven 2-Seven 2-Seven 2 (BB2)”, and the special role 2 is “BAR-BAR-BAR”. (RB) ".

  When the special combination 1 or special combination 2 is won internally, a special combination internal winning flag corresponding to the internal winning combination is set to ON (stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300). When this flag is set to ON, the main control unit 300 shifts the gaming state to the special combination internal winning state (hereinafter, this state may be referred to as RT3). This flag is kept on until winning the internal winning combination, and it becomes easy to win the internal winning combination in subsequent games. In other words, even if the special winning combination 1 or special winning combination 2 is not won, the special combination will be selected in the next and subsequent games, and the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination (for example, the special combination) In the case of winning an internal winning 1, the combination of “Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1 (BB1)” or “Seven 2-Seven 2-Seven 2 (BB2)”) will be in a state where it is easy to win. This special combination internal winning state (RT3) will be described later.

  The main control unit 300 shifts the gaming state to the special gaming state (hereinafter, this state may be referred to as RT4) based on the display of the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination 1 or special combination 2. Further, in this special game state, when a predetermined number of payouts are made, the game is shifted to a re-game low probability state (hereinafter, this state may be referred to as RT1). The special game state (RT4) and the replay low probability state (RT1) will be described later.

  The re-gamer is a winning player (operator) who can play a game without inserting medals (game media) in the next game by winning, and no medals are paid out. Note that the symbol combination corresponding to the re-gamer is “replay-replay-replay”.

  The re-game player may be any player who can play the next game without the player inserting medals. Therefore, for example, when a re-game is won, a medal may be automatically inserted in the next game (the medal insertion number is reset in a medal insertion number storage area described later), or a re-game is won. It is also possible to use a medal that has been thrown into the next game as it is in the next game.

  A “small role (small role 1 to small role 3)” (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “small role 1”, “small role 2”, and “small role 3” respectively), a predetermined number of medals are paid out by winning a prize. In the winning combination, the small combination 1 is “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon (watermelon)”, the small role 2 is “ANY-cherry-ANY”, and the small role 3 is “bell-bell-”. "Bell". The corresponding payout number is as shown in FIG. In the case of “ANY-Cherry-ANY”, the symbol of the middle reel 111 may be “Cherry”, and the symbol of the left reel 110 and the right reel 112 may be any symbol.

  As for the small role 3 (bell), there are “small role 3a” for winning when the order of the stop operation is correct and “small role 3b” for winning regardless of the order of the stop operation (for details) Later).

<Type of gaming state>
Next, the type and transition of the gaming state of the slot machine 100 will be described. FIG. 6 is a game state transition diagram of the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100.

  The main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100 has a replay low probability state (RT1), a replay high probability state (RT2), a special role internal winning state (RT3), and a special game state (RT4). . In the present embodiment, these four gaming states are referred to as RT gaming states. Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 300 also controls a state related to a so-called AT (assist time) (hereinafter referred to as an AT gaming state), and according to the AT gaming state determined by the main control unit 300, The first sub-control unit 400 sets an effect. As shown in FIG. 7, the AT gaming state of the main controller 300 has two gaming states, a normal state and an AT state.

  FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a lottery table for winning combinations in each gaming state. The horizontal axis represents each gaming state, and the vertical axis represents the lottery value for each winning combination. The internal winning probability of the winning combination in each gaming state to be described later is a random number obtained from the lottery data prepared in the ROM 306 corresponding to the range of the lottery data associated with each winning combination. It is obtained by a value divided by numerical data in a numerical range (for example, 65535). For example, in the replay low probability state (RT1), the lottery value of the small combination 1 is 512, and the winning probability of the small combination 1 is 512/65536 × 100≈0.8%. The lottery data is divided into several numerical ranges in advance, and each combination and lose is associated with each numerical range. It is determined whether the random number value obtained as a result of executing the internal lottery is a value corresponding to the lottery data corresponding to which combination, and the internal lottery combination is determined. This lottery data is provided with settings 1 to 6 in which the winning probabilities of at least one combination are different, and a game shop clerk can arbitrarily select and set one of the set values. In addition, the internal winning probability shown in this figure is an example, and is not limited to this probability.

  Hereinafter, the RT gaming state of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to the drawings as appropriate.

<Replay low probability state (RT1)>
The replay low probability state is a game state in which the internal winning probability of replay is the lowest (unfavorable for the player) among other game states (for example, game states other than the special game state), and is referred to as a normal game state There is also. In the replay low probability state, a winning combination to be internally won is drawn by referring to the lottery table in the column “RT1” on the horizontal axis shown in FIG.

  The winning combination for internal winning in the low replay state includes special role 1, special role 2, special role 1-small role 1, special role 1-small role 2, special role 2-small role 1, special role 2- There are a small role 2, a replaying role, a small role 1, a small role 2, and a small role 3a. If the winning combination is not won, the game is lost, and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not displayed. The fact that the symbol combination related to winning in the winning line is not stopped may be referred to as “losing”. In addition, the fact that the winning combination has not been won may be expressed as “winning”.

  Here, “special role 1—small role 1” indicates that special role 1 and small role 1 have been internally elected simultaneously. Similarly, “special role 1—small role 2” means that special role 1 and small role 2 were simultaneously elected internally, and “special role 2-small role 1” means that special role 2 and small role 1 were simultaneously “Special Special 2—Small 2” indicates that Special Special 2 and Small 2 were simultaneously elected internally. In these cases, it is determined whether the symbol combination corresponding to any of the combinations is displayed according to the player's operation. More specifically, the symbols constituting the symbol combination corresponding to the winning line are stopped unless any of the winning combinations in the winning line is impossible.

  The “small role 3a” is set such that the player's advantage and disadvantage differ according to the player's operation order. When “Pocket 3a” is won internally, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the small role 3 is displayed on the winning line according to the player's operation order (see the remarks column in FIG. 7). . More specifically, when a stop operation is performed in accordance with a correct operation sequence that is a predetermined operation sequence, “bell symbol-bell symbol-bell symbol” is displayed on the winning line, and eight medals are displayed. To be paid out. On the other hand, when the stop operation is not performed according to the correct operation sequence, “bell symbol-bell symbol-bell symbol” is not displayed on the winning line.

  In this embodiment, when the “small role 3a” is won internally, one reel stop data is selected from a plurality of types (specifically, six types) by lottery. This reel stop data A correct operation sequence is provided for each. More specifically, (1) when the reel stop data d-1 is selected, the first stop reel is the left reel 110, the second stop reel is the middle reel 111, and the third stop reel is the right reel 112. The stop operation to be performed (hereinafter also referred to as “left middle right” stop operation) is a stop operation according to the correct operation sequence. (2) When the reel stop data d-2 is selected, the first stop reel is moved to the left. A stop operation in which the reel 110, the second stop reel is the right reel 112, and the third stop reel is the middle reel 111 (hereinafter also referred to as “left middle right” stop operation) is a stop operation according to the correct operation sequence (3 ) When the reel stop data d-3 is selected, a stop operation (hereinafter referred to as “middle”) in which the first stop reel is the middle reel 111, the second stop reel is the left reel 110, and the third stop reel is the right reel 112. Also referred to as a “left and right” stop operation Is a stop operation according to the correct operation sequence, and (4) when reel stop data d-4 is selected, the first stop reel is the middle reel 111, the second stop reel is the right reel 112, and the third stop reel is Stop operation for the left reel 110 (hereinafter also referred to as “middle right left” stop operation) is a stop operation in accordance with the correct operation sequence. (5) When the reel stop data d-5 is selected, the first stop is performed. A stop operation in which the stop operation (hereinafter also referred to as a “right / left / middle stop operation”) in which the reel is the right reel 112, the second stop reel is the left reel 110, and the third stop reel is the middle reel 111, is in accordance with the correct operation sequence; (6) When the reel stop data d-6 is selected, a stop operation (hereinafter, referred to as a right reel 112, a second stop reel as a middle reel 111, and a third stop reel as a left reel 110) , "Right middle left Of also referred to as a stop operation) has become a stop operation in accordance with the correct operation order. That is, in this embodiment, the correct operation order regarding the first to third stop operations is determined for each selected reel stop data.

A combination in which the winning combination is determined by the operation order, such as “small combination 3a”, may be referred to as “operation order combination”.
In the present embodiment, a configuration is employed in which there is a payout in the case of correct answer in the operation order, but no payout in the case of an incorrect answer. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the number of payouts may be different depending on whether the operation order is correct or incorrect. In other words, any configuration may be used in which the correct answer in the operation order is more advantageous than the incorrect answer in the operation order. In the above description, the correct operation condition is the operation order. However, the correct operation condition is not limited to the operation order. Not only the operation order but also a configuration in which advantages and disadvantages may be generated by a stop operation timing or a combination of the operation order and the stop operation timing. The “small role 3a” described here is the same in the gaming state described below.

In addition, when “Pocket 3a” is won internally, the reel stop data is selected by lottery. However, the reel stop data having different correct operation order is associated with each of the plural types of small roles, A small combination may be awarded when an operation according to the correct operation sequence is performed. For example, the small role 3a is divided into six types of small roles 3a-1 to 3a-6, and eight medals are paid out regardless of which of the small roles 3a-1 to 3a-6 wins. On the other hand, when the small combination 3a-1 is internally won, the reel stop data d-1 is selected, and when the small combination 3a-2 is internally selected, the reel stop data d-2 is selected. If the small combination 3a-3 is won internally, the reel stop data d-3 is selected. If the small combination 3a-4 is internally selected, the reel stop data d-4 is selected, It is assumed that the reel stop data d-5 is selected when the internal winning is performed for 3a-5, and the reel stop data d-6 is selected when the internal winning is performed for the small combination 3a-6.
In this embodiment, the correct operation order is set for the reel stop data when the small combination 3a is won by itself. However, when the multiple small combinations are selected simultaneously, the correct operation order is set for the reel stop data. May be. For example, when a small role 3a wins, eight medals are paid out, and further, a small role 3a-1, a small role 3a-2, and a small role 3a-3 are provided. Medals will be paid out. Then, when the small combination 3a and the small combination 3a-1 are internally won, the reel stop data d-1x is selected, and when the small combination 3a and the small combination 3a-2 are internally selected, the reel stop data d When -2x is selected and the small combination 3a and the small combination 3a-3 are internally won, the reel stop data d-3x is selected. Reel stop data d-1x, d-2x, and d-3x are set such that eight medals are paid out when an operation in accordance with the correct answer operation order in which the largest payout is obtained, and the highest payout is obtained. If an operation according to the obtained correct answer operation sequence is not executed, one medal is paid out or the medal payout is zero. Since there may be a payout even if the operation according to the correct operation sequence is not executed, it may be an interesting game.

  FIG. 6 shows that when the AT lottery is won in the replay low probability state (RT1), the state shifts to a replay high probability state (RT2) described later. Also, the figure shows that when the special combination 1 or special combination 2 is won internally, the state shifts to a special combination internal winning state (RT3) described later. Furthermore, when the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination 1 or special combination 2 is displayed on the active line (when the special combination 1 or special combination 2 is won), the state shifts to a special gaming state (RT4) described later. It has been shown.

<Replay high probability state (RT2)>
The re-game high probability state (RT2) is a game state in which the internal winning probability of the re-gamer is higher than that of the re-game low probability state (RT1). In the re-playing high probability state (RT2), the winning combination to be won internally is lottery with reference to the lottery table in the column “RT2” on the horizontal axis shown in FIG.

  In the re-playing high probability state (RT2), the winning combination that is elected internally is special role 1, special role 2, special role 1-small role 1, special role 1-small role 2, special role 2-small role 1, special There are a role 2-a small role 2, a replaying role, a small role 1, a small role 2, and a small role 3 a. If the winning combination is not won, the game is lost, and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not displayed.

  FIG. 6 shows that in the replay high probability state (RT2), when all of the assigned AT games (30 games in this embodiment) are exhausted, the above-mentioned replay low probability state (RT1) is reached. It has been shown to migrate. In addition, in the same figure, it is shown that if special winning 1 or special winning 2 is won internally, it will shift to the special winning internal winning state (RT3) described later. When the corresponding symbol combination is displayed on the active line (when the special combination 1 or special combination 2 is won), it is shown that the state shifts to a special gaming state (RT4) described later.

<Special role internal winning state (RT3)>
The special combination internal winning state (RT3) is a state in which the internal winning flag corresponding to the special combination 1 or special combination 2 is set to ON, and when the player performs a stop operation at a predetermined timing, this flag is set. This is a gaming state in which a symbol combination corresponding to the corresponding special combination can be displayed. In the special combination internal winning state, the winning combination to be won internally is drawn by referring to the lottery table in the column “RT3” on the horizontal axis shown in FIG. The winning combination that is won internally in the special combination internal winning state includes a re-playing combination, a small combination 1, a small combination 2, and a small combination 3a. If the winning combination is not won, the game is lost, and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not displayed.

  Further, FIG. 6 shows that when a symbol combination corresponding to special role 1 or special role 2 is displayed in the special role internal winning state (RT3), the state shifts to a special game state (RT4) described later. Has been.

<Special gaming state (RT4)>
The special game state (RT4) is a game state that is most advantageous to the player among all the game states. In the special game state, the winning combination to be won internally is drawn by referring to the lottery table in the column “RT4” on the horizontal axis shown in FIG. The only winning combination that is won internally in the special gaming state is only the small combination 3b. If the winning combination is not won, the game is lost, and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not displayed.

  When “small role 3b” is won internally, “bell symbol-bell symbol-bell symbol” is displayed on the winning line regardless of the operation order, and eight medals are paid out. (See Figure 7 remarks column).

  FIG. 6 shows that in the special game state (RT4), when the specified number is paid out, the game shifts to the re-game low probability state (RT1). Specifically, in the case of shifting to the special gaming state based on the display of the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination 1, when the payout of 360 or more medals is completed, the re-gaming low probability state (RT1) is entered. Transition. In addition, in the case of shifting to the special gaming state based on the display of the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination 2, when the payout of 96 or more medals is completed, the transition to the re-gaming low probability state (RT1) is performed.

  In this embodiment, the special game state ends when a specified number of payouts are executed. For example, the special game state ends when a predetermined combination (for example, a single bonus) is won, or a predetermined number of times ( For example, the game may be ended when there are 8 winnings or when a predetermined number of games (for example, 6 times) are played.

<Transition of AT gaming state>
As shown in FIG. 6, the AT gaming state is uniquely determined based on the RT gaming state. That is, in this embodiment, the replay low probability state (RT1), the special role internal winning state (RT3), and the special game state (RT4) are normal states, and the replay high probability state (RT2) is AT. State.

  Here, in the case of the present embodiment, the AT state is a notification effect (hereinafter referred to as an operation condition notification effect) regarding the operation sequence of the stop operation when the small combination 3a that is the operation order combination is won internally in the winning combination internal lottery process. The normal state is a state in which the operation condition notification effect is not performed.

  More specifically, the AT state refers to a gaming state in which an operation condition notification effect including an operation timing or an operation sequence of stop operations is executed so as to bring a result advantageous to the player. A game in the AT state is also referred to as an AT game. In other words, the AT state is a gaming state in which the player can play the game without performing a small role winning by performing an operation according to the performance. In addition, in the game state where the game state is promoted and demoted, the AT state can maintain the advantageous game state without demoting the advantageous game state by performing an operation according to the performance by the player. It is also a gaming state that can be promoted from an unfavorable gaming state to an advantageous gaming state. The effect of notifying the operation order is an effect of notifying information related to the operation order that is the correct answer to the stop operation for winning the operation order combination. Further, the effect of notifying operation timing is an effect of notifying information related to an operation order combination in which so-called oversight occurs. For example, it is an effect of displaying a watermelon image on the liquid crystal display device 157 as information related to winning of the small role 1. Of course, an operation condition notification effect that notifies both the operation timing and the order of the stop operation may be used. Thus, the AT state is a gaming state advantageous for the player.

  Specifically, in the AT state, when the small winning combination 3a is won internally, an effect of notifying the correct operation sequence is executed. Therefore, when the player wins the small winning combination 3a internally, the player follows the effect. A medal can be obtained by performing the stop operation.

  In this embodiment, when an AT lottery executed when a small role 1 is internally won in RT1, the AT state (replay high probability state) is entered, and the AT state is a predetermined number of games (this implementation). In the form, when 30 games) are consumed, the game is finished and a normal state (replay low probability state) is entered. Of course, the AT state also ends when the transition of the gaming state of another RT system is accompanied (when transitioning from RT2 to another gaming state), and the AT system corresponding to the transitioning RT system gaming state Transition to gaming state.

  Note that the AT state of the present embodiment ends when a plurality of games are executed, but may be ended when one game is executed.

  In the following description, for example, when the RT gaming state of the main control unit 300 is in RT1 and the AT gaming state is in the normal state, the gaming state of the main control unit 300 is RT1 (normal state). ), The RT system gaming state of the main control unit 300 is in RT2, and the AT gaming state is in the AT state, the gaming state of the main control unit 300 is in RT2 (AT state). May be abbreviated.

<Reel stop control>
Next, an outline of the stop control of the reels 110 to 112 will be described. The reel stop control is performed by selecting one of a plurality of predetermined reel stop control data based on a predetermined condition (for example, the result of the internal winning process of the winning combination described above), and the selected reel stop control. Based on control data.

  In this embodiment, so-called pull-in control (frame slip control) is performed. With the pull-in control, the stop position of the reels 110 to 112 is shifted within a certain number of frames (number of symbols) (drawing range; here, a maximum of four frames) after each stop button 137 to 139 is operated by the player. Refers to control. The reel stop data is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. Each reel stop data includes a permissible control that allows a combination of symbols of a predetermined winning combination to be displayed on the winning line, and a prohibition control that does not display a combination of all winning combinations on the winning line. It is divided roughly.

  An example of the permissible control is, for example, when a winning combination is won internally, or when a special winning combination is being won internally (flag carryover), and when the player operates the stop buttons 137 to 139. Even if it is bad, control is performed so that the symbol combinations of winning combinations are displayed together within the range of the number of frames. However, since it is only “permitted”, there are cases where the symbol combinations are not aligned depending on the timing of operating each of the stop buttons 137 to 139.

  For example, when a small combination 1 (watermelon) is won internally, the watermelon symbol is arranged over 4 frames, so if the timing of operating the stop buttons 137 to 139 is not suitable, the watermelon symbol is placed on the winning line. Do not stop.

  However, 100% may be arranged depending on the arrangement of symbols on the reels 110 to 112 and the number of drawn frames. For example, since the replay symbol arrangement interval corresponding to the re-gamer (replay) is a maximum of 4 frames, if a re-gamer is won internally, 100% will be won regardless of the timing.

  On the other hand, an example in which prohibition control is performed is, for example, a case where the internal lottery result is lost, and the internal winning of the special role is not being performed (flag carryover), and the timing at which the player operates the stop buttons 137 to 139 Even if it is good, control is performed so that the symbol combinations of winning combinations are not displayed together within the range of the number of frames.

<Operation condition notification effect, state transition suggestion effect>
Next, the effects of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 8 is a time chart showing the execution timing of effects executed when the AT gaming state transitions and when in the AT state. Here, the normal effect means all effects that are executed when the AT gaming state is in the normal state. For example, the background effect that displays the normal background image d1 on the effect image display device 157 is one of the normal effects. One. The AT effect means an effect generally executed when the AT gaming state is in the AT state. For example, an operation condition notification for displaying the operation specifying image d10 and the operation correct image d20 on the effect image display device 157. The background effect that displays the effect and AT background image d2 on the effect image display device 157 is one of the AT effects.

  First, the operation condition notification effect will be described. As shown in FIG. 8, the operation condition notification effect is executed when the small combination 3a that is an operation order combination is won internally in the AT state (see time points t1 and t2).

  Fig.9 (a) is a figure which shows the alerting | reporting aspect of operation condition alerting | reporting effect. In the operation condition notification effect of the present embodiment, the operation specifying image d10 indicating the order of the correct stop operation is displayed on the effect image display device 157, and the order of the correct stop operation is displayed using the speakers 272 and 277. (For example, when the next stop operation is the left stop button 137, a sound such as “left”) is output, and various lamps 420 are used to light and blink (for example, the order of the correct stop operation) If the next stop operation is the left stop button 137, the left side lamp 144 is turned on and blinked).

  In the operation condition notification effect, as will be described later with reference to FIGS. 9B and 11, (1) when the player performs a correct stop operation, the operation specifying image d10 corresponding to the stop operation performed. Is displayed and an operation correct image d20 indicating that each individual stop operation is correct is displayed. (2) When the player performs an incorrect answer stop operation, An operation incorrect answer image d20a suggesting that the answer was incorrect is displayed.

  FIG. 9B shows a case where the small combination 3a is internally won in the AT state and the reel stop data d1 is selected, and the player performs a correct stop operation (stop operation of left middle right). The transition of the effect image of the operation condition notification effect is shown. Since the AT background image d2 is displayed as a background image in the AT state, the operation specifying image d10 and the operation correct image d20 are displayed on the AT background image d2. In the present embodiment, an effect image in which two characters (Mr. and Tsuji) confront each other is an AT background image d2.

  FIG. 9B-1 shows the display mode of the effect image display device 157 after the start lever operation. The slot machine 100 displays the operation specific image d10 based on the start lever operation. Specifically, when the correct stop operation is “left middle right”, the operation specifying image d10 in which the number 1 is written in the square frame at the lower center position of the screen, The operation specifying image d10 in which a number of 2 is written and the operation specifying image d10 in which a number of 3 is written in a square frame are displayed from the left in accordance with the positions of the stop buttons 137 to 139. As a result, the player determines that the first stop operation is an operation for the left stop button 137, the second stop operation is an operation for the middle stop button 138, and the third stop operation is a right stop button 139 based on the sequence of the numbers in the operation specific image d10. Know that this is an operation.

  FIG. 9B-2 shows a display mode of the effect image display device 157 after the first stop operation. In FIG. 9 (b-2), since the player operates the left stop button 137 as the first stop operation and the first stop operation is correct, the slot machine 100 performs an operation corresponding to the first stop operation. The specific image d10 is deleted, and the operation correct image d20 suggesting that the first stop operation was correct is displayed at the position where the operation specific image d10 corresponding to the first stop operation was displayed.

  Here, the operation correct answer image d20 is specifically a graphic image in which OK characters are written in a frame of a shape representing explosion / rupture, and a predetermined time L1 from the start of display (in the present embodiment, about 1 second (hereinafter also referred to as “display time L1”).

  FIG. 10A shows how the operation correct answer image d20 displayed based on the first stop operation changes. From time t11 of the first stop operation until the time t12 when the predetermined time M1 (<L1) elapses, the operation correct image d20 with a transparency of 0 is displayed, and from time t12, the predetermined time L1 has elapsed from the time t11 of the first stop operation. Until the time t13, the operation correct image d20 whose transparency gradually changes from 0 to 100 is displayed (the operation correct image d20 gradually disappears), and finally the operation correct image d20 at the time t13. Disappears.

  FIG. 10B is a diagram comparing the size of the operation correct image d20 and the operation specifying image d10 after the first stop operation. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10B, the operation correct image d20 is an image larger than the operation specific image d10 and is displayed in front of the operation specific image d10. Is more conspicuous than the operation specific image d10. This is because the player emphasizes and notifies that there is a correct operation. Hereinafter, displaying the operation correct image d20 larger than the operation specifying image d10 may be referred to as “enlarged display of the operation correct image d20”.

  In the present embodiment, the operation correct image d20 based on the second stop operation and the third stop operation is also the same animation image, and the operation is also the same. Of course, the operation correct image d20 is not limited to the shape, pattern, and color shown in FIG. 10, and may be, for example, an image without characters or a moving image with characters moving. In addition, the operation correct images d20 based on the first stop operation, the second stop operation, and the third stop operation may be images corresponding to the respective operations. In some cases, it may be easier to grasp the progress of the operation.

  In the present embodiment, the transparency of the operation correct image d20 is changed. However, the transparency of the operation correct image d20 may not be changed. For example, the operation correct image d20 may be displayed with the same transparency (for example, 50) from time t11 to time t13. In this case, the visibility of the background image d2 is not hindered (the display area of the background image d2 is the same as before and after the operation correct answer image d20 is displayed).

  Returning to FIG. 9, FIG. 9B-3 shows the display mode of the effect image display device 157 after the operation correct image d20 displayed based on the first stop operation disappears (after the display time L1 has elapsed). Show. At this time, the slot machine 100 continuously displays the operation specifying image d10 regarding the remaining stop operations (second stop operation, third stop operation) as the operation condition notification effect.

  FIG. 9B-4 shows the display mode of the effect image display device 157 after the second stop operation. In FIG. 9 (b-4), since the player operates the middle stop button 138 as the second stop operation and the second stop operation is correct, the slot machine 100 determines the operation corresponding to the second stop operation. The image d10 is erased, and the operation correct image d20 suggesting that the second stop operation is correct is displayed at the position where the operation specific image d10 corresponding to the second stop operation was displayed.

  FIG. 9B-5 shows a display mode of the output image display device 157 after the operation correct image d20 displayed based on the second stop operation disappears (after the display time L1 has elapsed). At this time, the slot machine 100 displays the operation specifying image d10 regarding the remaining stop operation (third stop operation) as the operation condition notification effect.

  FIG. 9B-6 shows a display mode of the effect image display device 157 after the third stop operation. In FIG. 9 (b-6), since the player performed the operation on the right stop button 139 as the third stop operation, and the third stop operation was correct, the slot machine 100 specifies the operation corresponding to the third stop operation. The image d10 is erased, and the operation correct image d20 suggesting that the third stop operation is correct is displayed at the position where the operation specific image d10 corresponding to the third stop operation was displayed.

  FIG. 9B-7 shows a display mode of the effect image display device 157 after the operation correct image d20 displayed based on the third stop operation disappears (after the display time L1 has elapsed). Since the operation condition notification effect has ended, the slot machine 100 displays only the AT background image d2.

  As described above, the operation condition notification effect according to the present embodiment not only displays the operation specific image d10 to notify the operation contents advantageous to the player, but also when the correct operation is performed, each time the operation correct image is displayed. d20 is displayed to notify that the operation is correct. Further, since the operation correct answer image d20 is displayed larger than the operation specifying image d10 and is emphasized, the player can more easily recognize that the correct answer stop operation has been performed.

  FIG. 11 shows a case where the small combination 3a is internally won in the AT state and the reel stop data d1 is selected, and the player performs an incorrect answer stop operation (the first stop operation is an operation on the right stop button 139). The transition of the operation condition notification effect when performed is shown. Hereinafter, the difference from the correct stop operation will be mainly described.

  FIG. 11A-2 shows the display mode of the effect image display device 157 after the first stop operation. In FIG. 11 (a-2), since the player operates the right stop button 139 as the first stop operation and the first stop operation is incorrect, the slot machine 100 performs an operation corresponding to the first stop operation. An operation incorrect answer image d20a suggesting that the first stop operation was incorrect is displayed at the position where the specific image d10 was displayed.

  Here, the operation incorrect answer image d20a is specifically a graphic image in which a character of NO is written in a frame of a shape representing explosion / rupture, and has the same size as the operation correct answer image d20, Similar to the operation correct image d20, the animation image disappears after a predetermined time L1 from the start of display. That is, the display change with time of the operation incorrect answer image d20a is accompanied by the same process as the operation correct answer image d20 shown in FIG. 10A, and the size thereof is shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 6, the image is larger than the operation specific image d10 and is displayed in front of the operation specific image d10. Hereinafter, displaying the operation incorrect answer image d20a larger than the operation specifying image d10 may be referred to as “enlarged display of the operation incorrect answer image d20a”.

  In the present embodiment, the operation incorrect answer image d20a based on the second stop operation and the third stop operation is also the same animation image, and the operation is also the same. Of course, the operation incorrect answer image d20a is not limited to the shape, pattern, and color shown in FIG. 11, and may be, for example, an image without characters or a moving image with characters moving. . The correct operation image d20a based on the first stop operation, the second stop operation, and the third stop operation may be an image corresponding to each operation. In some cases, it may be easier to grasp the progress of the operation.

  FIG. 11A-3 shows a display mode of the output image display device 157 after the operation incorrect image d20 displayed based on the first stop operation has disappeared. At this time, unlike the correct stop operation, the slot machine 100 displays the operation specifying image d10 regarding all stop operations (first stop operation, second stop operation, and third stop operation).

  11 (a-4) shows the display mode of the effect image display device 157 after the second stop operation, and FIG. 11 (a-6) shows the display mode of the effect image display device 157 after the third stop operation. Yes. Since the correct operation sequence of the present embodiment is so-called “6 choices”, if the first stop operation is incorrect, the second stop operation and the third stop operation are incorrect. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 11 (a-4) and (a-6), the slot machine 100 has, at each position where the operation specific image d10 corresponding to the second stop operation and the third stop operation is displayed. An operation incorrect answer image d20 suggesting that the second stop operation and the third stop operation are incorrect is displayed.

  In addition, after the operation incorrect answer image d20 displayed based on the second stop operation disappears, the operation specifying image d10 regarding all stop operations (first stop operation, second stop operation, third stop operation) is similarly displayed. Is displayed (see FIG. 11 (a-5)).

  As described above, the operation condition notification effect of the present embodiment not only displays the operation correct image d20 and notifies that the operation is correct each time a correct operation is performed, but also performs an incorrect operation. In each case, the operation incorrect answer image d20a is displayed to notify that the operation is incorrect. Since the operation incorrect answer image d20a is displayed larger than the operation specifying image d10 and emphasized, the player can more easily recognize that the incorrect answer stop operation has been performed.

  Next, the state transition suggestion effect will be described. As shown in FIG. 8, the state transition suggestion effect is an image effect executed in the final game G1 in the normal state and the final game G2 in the AT state, and a game operation (start lever operation, first stop operation, second stop). This is an effect of displaying an insertion image d30 that gradually covers the background image (the normal background image d1 in the normal state and the AT background image d2 in the AT state) each time the operation or the third stop operation). Specifically, the inserted image d30 is an effect image that is inserted when the normal background image d1 changes to the AT background image d2 when transitioning from the normal state to the AT state, and changes from the AT state to the normal state. In this case, the effect image is inserted when the AT background image d2 changes to the normal background image d1. That is, in the present embodiment, the background image is changed through the display of the insertion image d30.

  Although the details will be described later, the operations of the operation condition notification effect and the state transition suggestion effect are set in consideration of the case where both effects are executed simultaneously. Therefore, the state transition suggestion effect is an effect of gradually expanding the area (area) of the insertion image d30 without displaying the insertion image d30 in an instant over the entire display area of the effect image display device 157.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 12, the insertion image d30 is a “border” image, and the “border” is gradually lowered from the upper side of the screen toward the lower side. The display area (display area) of the image d30 is enlarged, and the display area (display area) of the background image is gradually shielded. Specifically, the slot machine 100 is triggered by one game operation (start lever operation, first to third stop operations) for a predetermined time L2 (in the present embodiment, about 0.1 second, hereinafter also referred to as a travel time L2). ) Is displayed at a constant speed, and after the predetermined time L2 has elapsed, the “stop” image that has stopped moving is displayed until the next stop operation is performed. Yes. Note that in the case of the third stop operation, the display of “binder” is erased after the elapse of a predetermined time L3 after the movement of “binder” has stopped.

  FIG. 12A is a time chart showing changes in the inserted image d30 displayed on the effect image display device 157 in the state transition suggestion effect. FIG. 12A shows a state transition suggesting effect in the final game G1 in the normal state in which the normal background image d1 is displayed. In the present embodiment, the effect image in which two characters (dono and niece) appear is the normal background image d1.

  FIG. 12A-1 shows the display mode of the effect image display device 157 after the start lever operation. The slot machine 100 starts displaying the insertion image d30 based on the start lever operation, and enlarges and moves the area of the insertion image d30 from the top to the bottom of the screen. Then, after the start lever operation, the movement of the insertion image d30 is stopped when the predetermined time L2 has elapsed, and the insertion image d30 is displayed in about 1/3 of the display area of the effect image display device 157. Thereafter, the insertion image d30 whose movement has been stopped is continuously displayed.

  FIG. 12A-2 shows the display mode of the effect image display device 157 after the first stop operation. The slot machine 100 further enlarges and moves the region of the insertion image d30 downward based on the first stop operation. Then, after the first stop operation, the movement of the insertion image d30 is stopped when the predetermined time L2 has elapsed, and the insertion image d30 is displayed in about 2/5 of the display area of the effect image display device 157. Thereafter, the insertion image d30 whose movement has been stopped is continuously displayed.

  FIG. 12B is a diagram showing a display change of the insertion image d30 that operates based on the first stop operation. Here, FIG. 12B shows a display change of the inserted image d30 when the left stop button 137 is operated as the first stop operation, and the inserted image d30 that starts to move downward with the left stop button 137 as a trigger. Indicates that the movement is stopped when a predetermined time L2 (about 0.1 second) elapses.

  In this embodiment, since the time until the next stop operation becomes effective after the stop operation is about 0.2 seconds, the next stop operation is not effective during the movement of the blind, and the movement of the blind After stopping, the next stop operation becomes effective. That is, in the present embodiment, the change of the insertion image d30 is quickly completed, so the change of the insertion image d30 does not interfere with the stop operation.

  Returning to FIG. 12 (a), FIGS. 12 (a-3) and 12 (a-4) show the display modes of the effect image display device 157 after the second stop operation and after the third stop operation, respectively. ing. As in the case of the first stop operation, the slot machine 100 further enlarges and moves the region of the insertion image d30 downward based on the second stop operation and the third stop operation. Then, after the second stop operation and the third stop operation, the movement of the insertion image d30 is stopped when the predetermined time L2 has elapsed, and the insertion image d30 is displayed in about half of the display area of the effect image display device 157, Or displayed in about 3/4 of the display area of the effect image display device 157. Thereafter, the insertion image d30 whose movement has been stopped is continuously displayed.

  After the third stop operation, the effect image display device 157 is entirely covered with the insertion image d30 as shown in FIG. 12 (a-5). Then, when the predetermined time L3 has elapsed from this state, the slot machine 100 deletes the inserted image d30 and, as shown in FIG. 12 (a-6), produces an AT background image d2 indicating the AT state as an effect image. It is displayed on the display device 157. As a result, the player can grasp that the AT state is reached from the change of the background image.

  In the present embodiment, the inserted image d30 is a “blade” image, but the inserted image d30 is not limited to this. The inserted image d30 may be any image as long as it is a conspicuous plain image (for example, a single color, a uniform uniform pattern, etc.). This is because in the present embodiment, it is desired to make the player pay attention to the operation correct answer image d20 (operation incorrect answer image d20a) described above. In the present embodiment, the method of erasing the inserted image d30 in an instant is adopted. However, the method is not limited to this, and the erasing may be gradually performed. Moreover, you may give a variation in the time until the insertion image d30 displayed on the whole surface of the effect image display apparatus 157 is deleted. For example, 3 seconds, 2 seconds, and 1 second are provided as a plurality of types of time, and one of these times is selected. When the gaming state after displaying the insertion image d30 is a gaming state advantageous to the player, 3 seconds, which is a long time, is easily selected, and the gaming state after displaying the insertion image d30 is a disadvantageous game for the player. If it is easy to select 1 second, which is a short time in the state, the player's expectation may be changed depending on the time until the inserted image d30 displayed on the front side is deleted.

  Further, the insertion image d30 may be set to increase the appearance display frequency of a conspicuous plain image and decrease the appearance display frequency of a conspicuous image (for example, a floral pattern or a rainbow color). If a rarely conspicuous image is filed, the benefit may be expected.

  Note that the display of the inserted image d30 according to the present embodiment is started when the start lever is operated. However, another display may be used, for example, the display may be started based on the end of one game. The display may be started based on the insertion of a game medal. In the present embodiment, the case where the insertion image d30 is displayed in front of the normal background image d1 has been described. However, the insertion image d30 and the normal background image d1 may not be displayed in an overlapping manner. In a situation where the insertion image d30 and the normal background image d1 do not overlap, the display of the normal background image d1 may be reduced as the display of the insertion image d30 is enlarged.

  The state transition suggestion effect of the present embodiment is executed when the AT gaming state changes, but may also be executed when the AT gaming state does not change. . For example, an effect displayed during the normal state (an effect expected to shift from the normal state to the AT state. The normal background image d1 is displayed, the insertion image d30 is displayed, and the normal background image d1 is displayed) may be displayed. Also, it may be an effect displayed during the AT state (an effect that surprises when the AT state is shifted to the normal state. The AT background image d2 is displayed, the insertion image d30 is displayed, and the AT background image d2 is displayed). There are cases where the player can be surprised.

  Next, a case where the operation condition notification effect and the state transition suggestion effect are executed in the same game will be described. In the present embodiment, when the operation order combination is internally won in the final game in the AT state, both the operation condition notification effect and the execution condition of the state transition suggestion effect are satisfied. Are executed simultaneously.

  In addition, although mentioned later in detail, in this embodiment, even if it is a case where an operation condition alerting | reporting effect and a state transition suggestion effect are performed simultaneously, operation | movement of each effect performs the same operation | movement as the case where it performs independently. . In other words, both the operation condition notification effect and the state transition suggestion effect have the same effect data when executed independently and when both effects are executed. Is set in consideration of the case where both effects are executed simultaneously.

  FIG. 13A shows a case where the small role 3a is internally won in the final game in the AT state and the reel stop data d1 is selected, and the player performs the correct stop operation (stop operation on the left middle right). The change of the operation condition notification effect production image (operation specific image d10, operation correct image d20) and the state transition suggestion production insertion image d30 when performed is shown.

  FIG. 13A-1 shows a display mode of the effect image display device 157 before the start lever operation. Since the slot machine 100 is in the AT state, the AT background image d2 is displayed as a background image.

  FIG. 13A-2 shows a display mode of the effect image display device 157 after the start lever operation. After the start lever operation, the slot machine 100 displays the operation specific image d10 on the AT background image d2 and starts displaying the insertion image d30 based on the start lever operation, and the region of the insertion image d30 is displayed from the top of the screen. Enlarge and move downward.

  Here, the operation specifying image d10 and the insertion image d30 shown in FIG. 13 (a-2) are the insertion specifying image d30 shown in FIG. 12 (a-1) and the operation specifying image shown in FIG. 9 (b-1). It is the same as d10. In other words, the movement time of the “border” that is the insertion image d30, the movement mode such as the movement position (stop position), and the display mode of the operation specifying image d10 are exactly the same as when executed alone. The inserted image d30 and the operation specifying image d10 that change based on the subsequent stop operation are also the same as the inserted image d30 shown in FIG. 12A and the operation specifying image d10 shown in FIG. 9B. .

  The slot machine 100 stops the movement of the insertion image d30 when the predetermined time L2 has elapsed after the start lever operation, and thereafter continuously displays the insertion image d30 whose movement has been stopped.

  FIG. 13A-3 shows the display mode of the effect image display device 157 after the first stop operation. Based on the first stop operation, the slot machine 100 displays the operation correct image d20 at the position where the operation specific image d10 corresponding to the first stop operation is displayed, and further enlarges the area of the insertion image d30 downward. Let Moreover, although it repeats, the display mode of the operation correct image d20 shown to FIG. 13 (a-3) is completely the same as the display mode of the operation correct image d20 shown in FIG.9 (b). That is, even when the operation condition notification effect and the state transition suggestion effect are executed at the same time, the operation correct answer image d20 is displayed to be larger and more conspicuous than the operation specifying image d10.

  The slot machine 100 stops the movement of the insertion image d30 when the predetermined time L2 has elapsed after the first stop operation, and thereafter continuously displays the insertion image d30 whose movement has been stopped.

  FIG. 13A-4 shows a display mode of the effect image display device 157 after the second stop operation. Based on the second stop operation, the slot machine 100 displays the operation correct image d20 at the position where the operation specific image d10 corresponding to the second stop operation is displayed, and further expands the area of the insertion image d30 downward. Let

  The slot machine 100 stops the movement of the insertion image d30 when the predetermined time L2 has elapsed after the second stop operation, and thereafter continuously displays the insertion image d30 whose movement has been stopped.

  FIG. 13A-5 shows the display mode of the effect image display device 157 after the third stop operation. Based on the third stop operation, the slot machine 100 displays the operation correct image d20 at the position where the operation specific image d10 corresponding to the third stop operation was displayed, and further expands the area of the insertion image d30 downward. Let In the case of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13 (a-5), when the operation correct image d20 and the insertion image d30 overlap, the operation correct image d20 is made to stand out, so that the operation correct image d20 is inserted. Is displayed in front of.

  The slot machine 100 stops the movement of the insertion image d30 when the predetermined time L2 has elapsed after the third stop operation, and thereafter continuously displays the insertion image d30 whose movement has been stopped.

  FIG. 13 (a-6) shows the display mode of the effect image display device 157 when the movement of the insertion image d30 based on the third stop operation is completed. The effect image display device 157 is the entire insertion image d30. Covered with. When the predetermined time L3 has elapsed from this state, the slot machine 100 erases the inserted image d30 and produces a normal background image d1 indicating the normal state, as shown in FIG. 13 (a-7). The image is displayed on the image display device 157. As a result, the player can grasp that the normal state is reached from the change of the background image.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the operation condition notification effect and the state transition suggestion effect are executed at the same time, the inserted image d30 is directed toward the operation specifying image d10 and the operation correct image d20 as shown in FIG. Therefore, it is possible to give an impression that the peripheral region of the operation correct image d20 is narrowed, and the operation correct image d20 can be further emphasized. More specifically, each time the stop operation is performed three times, the inserted image d30 is enlarged and moved downward at substantially the same rate, and the operation correct image d20 corresponding to each stop operation is displayed in an enlarged manner. Each d20 can stand out.

  In recent years, there is a tendency to increase the size of the effect image display device 157 in order to enhance the effect. However, with the increase in the size of the effect image display device 157, various new problems have arisen. The above-mentioned display of the state transition suggestion effect is one of them.

  Conventionally, the background image displayed in the entire image display area is an image of an expression mode with little change in order to make an image or the like suggesting a lottery result conspicuous. Therefore, in the case of displaying an image intended to change the background image (for example, the inserted image d30 of the state transition suggestion effect), if the player gives an impression that it is not a background image or displays a larger image than before, the player You may get an unexpected impression.

  As described above, in the display of the state transition suggestion effect, the inserted image d30 of the state transition suggestion effect gives the player an impression that the designer does not intend, and as a result, the player's operation feeling is upset. There was a possibility.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the insertion image d30 of the state transition suggestion effect is displayed, the display related to the player operation (for example, the operation correct image d20) is made conspicuous.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display time L1 (about 1 second) of the operation correct image d20 is longer than the movement time L2 (about 0.1 second) of the insertion image d30, so that the player can move the insertion image d30. The operation correct image d20 in the completed state can be shown for a longer time (about 0.9 seconds) than the operation correct image d20 being moved. As a result, the player can more easily understand that the stop operation is correct.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, although the insertion image d30 is enlarged and moved, the region of the operation specific image d10 is not blocked, so that the notification content of the operation specific image d10 is visually disturbed during the stop operation. Absent. This will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating display positions of the insertion image d30 and the operation specifying image d10 immediately before the third stop operation of the game in which the operation condition notification effect and the state transition suggestion effect are simultaneously executed. Specifically, FIG. 14A shows a case where the correct third stop operation is an operation on the right stop button 139, and FIG. 14B shows a case where the correct third stop operation is an operation on the middle stop button 138. FIG. 14C shows a case where the correct third stop operation is an operation on the left stop button 137. Here, “immediately before the third stop operation” means a time point between (a-4) and (a-5) in FIG. 13A, and the enlarged movement of the insertion image d30 based on the second stop operation is stopped. The time when the inserted image d30 is in a stopped state. That is, immediately before the third stop operation, the lower end of the insertion image d30 is at the lowest limit position P4 based on the second stop operation.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 14A to 14C, the inserted image d30 immediately before the third stop operation is the operation specific image d10 for the third stop operation, regardless of the correct stop operation. Since it is not hidden, the contents of the operation specific image d10 from the first stop operation to the third stop operation are surely confirmed even when any operation specific image d10 is selected from among the plurality of types of operation specific images d10. The player can be notified. As a result, the player can perform a correct stop operation without being disturbed by the enlarged movement of the insertion image d30.

  As described above, in the game that simultaneously executes the operation condition notification effect and the state transition suggestion effect of the present embodiment, the enlarged movement of the insertion image d30 highlights the operation correct image d20, while the insertion image d30 is the operation specific image. Since the movement is performed in consideration not to hide d10, the player can perform the stop operation with peace of mind.

  In addition, although the case where the player performed the correct stop operation in the game that simultaneously executes the operation condition notification effect and the state transition suggestion effect was described with reference to FIGS. 13 and 14, the incorrect answer stop operation was performed. Even in this case, the slot machine 100 performs substantially the same operation. That is, the slot machine 100 performs the same operation except that the operation incorrect answer image d20a is displayed instead of the operation correct answer image d20, and the enlarged movement of the insertion image d30 emphasizes the operation incorrect answer image d20 to make it stand out. Thus, the insertion image d30 is enlarged and moved so as not to hide the operation specific image d10.

<Operation of slot machine>
Hereinafter, processing of the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to the drawings.

<Main control unit main processing>
First, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of the main control unit.

  As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 338 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal has been input resets by a reset interrupt and executes the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG. 15 in accordance with a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

  When the power is turned on, first, various initial settings are made in step S101. In this initial setting, setting of a stack initial value to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting of interrupt prohibition, initial setting of the I / O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, operation permission to the WDT 314, and initial setting Set the value.

  In step S102, a bet number setting / start operation accepting process is executed. Here, it is checked whether or not a medal has been inserted, and preparation for sending an insertion command indicating that a medal has been inserted is made. When a re-game player is won in the previous game, the same number of medals as the number of medals inserted in the previous game are processed, so that it is not necessary for the player to insert medals. Further, it is checked whether or not the start lever 135 has been operated. If there is an operation of the start lever 135, the process proceeds to step S103. In step S102, when there is an operation of the start lever 135, preparation is made to transmit a start lever operation command indicating that the start lever has been operated to the first sub-control unit 400.

  In step S103, a winning line determination process for determining the number of inserted medals and determining a valid winning line is performed.

  In step S104, a random number acquisition process for acquiring a random number generated by the random number generation circuit 316 is performed.

  In step S105, a winning combination internal lottery process is performed. In the winning combination internal lottery process, the winning combination lottery table stored in the ROM 306 is read according to the current game state, and the internal lottery is performed using this and the random value acquired in step S104. Preparation for transmitting an internal lottery command indicating the result to the first sub-control unit 400 is performed. As a result of the internal lottery, when any winning combination (including an operating combination) is won internally, the flag of the winning combination is turned on. Note that, as a result of the winning combination internal lottery process, when winning the small combination 1 and winning the AT lottery, the internal lottery command includes information indicating the small combination 1 winning and the AT winning combination.

  In step S106, a reel stop data selection process for selecting reel stop data is performed based on the internal lottery result of the winning combination internal lottery process. The reel stop data is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. In step S106, preparations are made to transmit a reel stop data command including information on the selected reel stop data to the first sub-control unit 400. When the small combination 3a is won internally, the reel stop data and the correct stop operation sequence have a one-to-one relationship, so the first sub-control unit 400 stops the correct answer from the received reel stop data command. It is possible to grasp the operation order.

  In step S107, a reel rotation start process is executed to start rotation of all the reels 110 to 112.

  In step S108, a reel stop control process is performed. In the reel stop control process, the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be received. When any one of the stop buttons is pressed, a reel stop data stop table is set to stop the reel corresponding to the pressed stop button. With reference, any of the reels 110 to 112 is stopped according to the number of frames drawn in the stop table. When all the reels 110 to 112 are stopped, the process proceeds to step S110. In this step S108, for each stop operation, a stop button reception command relating to the stop buttons 137 to 139 that have been operated to stop (specifically, for the first stop operation, the stop button reception 1 command, the second stop operation In response to the stop button reception 2 command and the third stop operation, the stop button reception 3 command) is prepared for transmission to the first sub-control unit 400. Reel stop command related to the stop position (specifically, a reel stop 1 command for the first stop reel, a reel stop 2 command for the second stop operation, and a reel stop for the third stop operation. 3 commands) is prepared for transmission to the first sub-control unit 400.

  In step S109, a winning determination process for determining a winning is performed. In this winning determination process, when a picture combination corresponding to some winning combination is displayed on the activated winning line 114, it is determined that the winning combination is won. For example, if “bell-bell-bell” is aligned on the activated winning line, it is determined that the winning combination 3 (bell) is won. Further, in this step S109, preparation is made for transmitting a winning determination command indicating the result of the winning determination to the first sub-control unit 400.

  In step S110, a medal grant process is performed. In the medal granting process, if any winning combination with payout is won, the number of medals corresponding to the winning combination is paid out according to the number of winning lines.

  In step S111, a game state control process (described later in detail) is performed. In the gaming state control processing, processing relating to transition of each gaming state of the RT system and the AT system is performed, and the gaming state is shifted when the start condition or the end condition is satisfied. Also, preparation is made for transmitting a game state command including information (RT system and AT system) indicating the current game state.

  Thus, one game is completed. Thereafter, the game proceeds by returning to step S102 and repeating the above-described processing.

  The various commands prepared in the above steps are transmitted in a command setting transmission process (step S1006 in FIG. 16) of the main control unit timer interrupt process described later.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, a main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, about once every 2 ms), and the main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The process is started at a predetermined cycle.

  In step S1001, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving each register value of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

  In step S1002, the count value of WDT 314 exceeds the initial setting value (32.8 ms in the present embodiment), and WDT 314 is periodically updated (so as not to detect a processing abnormality) so that a WDT interrupt does not occur. In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every about 2 ms, which is the period of the main control unit timer interrupt.

  In step S1003, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port status update process, the detection signals of the sensor circuits 320 of the various sensors 318 are input via the input ports of the I / O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals, and each of the various sensors 318 is partitioned in the RAM 308. Store in the provided signal state storage area.

  In step S1004, various game processes are executed, and processes according to the interrupt status are executed.

  In step S1005, timer update processing is performed. More specifically, various timers are updated for each time unit.

  In step S1006, command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands prepared for transmission are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the production control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300 by the command type included in the received output schedule information, and it is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the contents of effect control can be determined.

  In step S1007, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to an information input circuit 652 separate from the slot machine 100 via the information output circuit 334.

  In step S1008, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, first, the signal states of the various sensors 318 stored in the signal state storage area in step S1003 are read, and the presence / absence of errors relating to medal insertion abnormality and medal payout abnormality is monitored. (Not shown) Error processing is executed. Further, the medal selector 170 (medal blocker in which a solenoid provided in the medal selector 170 operates), various lamps 339, and various 7-segment (SEG) indicators are set according to the current gaming state.

  In step S1009, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. If the low voltage signal is on (when the power supply is detected to be shut off), the process proceeds to step S1011. If the low voltage signal is off (when the power supply is not shut off), the process proceeds to step S1010.

  In step S1010, various processes for ending the timer interrupt end process are performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S1001 is set in each original register. Thereafter, the process returns to the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, in step S1011, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved as a return data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and power-off processing such as initialization of input / output ports is performed. After that, the process returns to the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG.

<Game state control processing>
Next, the gaming state control process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the gaming state control process in step S111 of FIG.

  In step S201, AT update processing is performed. In the AT update process, when the AT game state of the main control unit 300 is the AT state (RT game state is RT2), a process of counting the number of games in the AT state is performed. Specifically, 1 is subtracted from the current remaining number of games in the AT state.

  In step S202, it is determined whether or not the special combination 1 or special combination 2 has been won. If the special combination 1 or special combination 2 is won, the process proceeds to step S203. Otherwise, the process proceeds to step S204.

  In step S203, since the special combination 1 or special combination 2 is won, the RT gaming state is set to RT4 and the AT gaming state is set to the normal state. After the process of step S203 is complete | finished, it progresses to step S210.

  In step S204, it is determined whether or not the current remaining number of games in the AT state is zero. If the current remaining number of games in the AT state is 0, that is, if the AT state has ended, the process proceeds to step S205, and if not, the process proceeds to step S206.

  In step S205, since the current remaining number of games in the AT state is 0, the RT gaming state is set to RT1, and the AT gaming state is set to the normal state. After the process of step S205 is completed, the process proceeds to step S210.

  In step S206, it is determined whether or not AT is won in the current game. If AT is won in the current game, the process proceeds to step S707, and if not, the process proceeds to step S208.

  In step S207, since the AT lottery is won in the current game of RT1, the RT game state is set to RT2, and the AT game state is set to the AT state. After the process of step S207 is completed, the process proceeds to step S210.

  In step S208, it is determined whether the special combination 1 or special combination 2 has been won internally. If the special combination 1 or special combination 2 is won internally, the process proceeds to step S209. If not, the process proceeds to step S210.

  In step S209, since the special combination 1 or special combination 2 is internally won, the RT gaming state is set to RT3 and the AT gaming state is set to the normal state. After the process of step S209 ends, the process proceeds to step S210.

  In step S210, other game state control processing is performed. For example, when the gaming state wins special role 1 and shifts to RT4 (normal state), RT4 (normal state) is terminated by paying out more than 360 medals, and RT1 (normal state) is set. Further, when the gaming state wins special role 2 and shifts to RT4 (normal state), RT4 (normal state) is terminated by paying out more than 96 medals, and RT1 (normal state) is set. In step S210, the main control unit 300 prepares to transmit a gaming state command indicating the gaming state of the RT system and the AT system. In the case of the AT state, information regarding the number of AT games is also included in the gaming state command.

<Processing of first sub-control unit>
Next, processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 18B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 18C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, the main process of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG.

  When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S3001. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed. In this process, an area for storing internal winning information that is information representing the result of the internal winning and an area for storing RT update information that is information indicating the gaming state are provided in the RAM 408, respectively.

  In step S3002, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S3003.

  In step S3003, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

  In step S3004, command processing that is processing corresponding to each command received from the main control unit 300 is executed.

  In step S3005, an effect control process (details will be described later) is performed. Here, preparation for the production is performed according to the production reservation information in the production reservation area provided in the RAM 408. This preparation includes, for example, performing a process such as reading the effect data from the ROM 406 and performing an effect data update process when the effect data needs to be updated.

  In step S3006, sound control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S3005. For example, if there is a command to the sound source IC 418 in the effect data read in step S3005, this command is output to the sound source IC 418.

  In step S3007, lamp control processing is performed based on the processing result in step S3005. For example, if there is a command to the various lamps 420 in the effect data read out in step S3005, this command is output to the drive circuit 422.

  In step S3008, shutter control processing is performed based on the processing result in step S3005. For example, when there is a shutter control command in the effect data read in step S3005, shutter control corresponding to this command is performed.

  In step S3009, an information output process for performing setting to transmit a command to the second sub-control unit 500 based on the processing result in step S3005 is performed. For example, if there is a command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read out in step S3005, the control command is set to be output, and the process returns to step S3002.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output from the main control unit 300. In step S3101 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the main control unit 300 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408 as an unprocessed command.

  Next, the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms), and the timer interrupt process is performed by using the timer interrupt as a trigger. Execute in the cycle.

  In step S3201, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S3002 in the first sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. 18A, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Accordingly, in step S3002, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step S3202, a command is transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 set in step S3008, an effect random number value is updated, and the like.

<Processing of second sub-control unit>
Next, processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 19B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 19C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 19D is a flowchart of the image control process of the second sub control unit 500.

  First, in step S5001 in FIG. 19A, various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S5001. In this initialization process, input / output port initialization, storage area initialization in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

  In step S5002, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S5003.

  In step S5003, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

  In step S5004, command processing is performed. In the command processing, the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether a command is received from the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400.

  In step S5005, effect control processing is performed. Specifically, if there is a new command in step S5004, processing corresponding to this command is performed. For example, a process of reading effect data for performing image control relating to the background image and effect data relating to the shutter effect from the ROM 506 is executed. In addition, it includes a process of reading other effect data from the ROM 506 and performing an effect data update process when the effect data needs to be updated.

  In step S5006, image control processing (described in detail later) is performed based on the processing result in step S5005. For example, if there is an image control command in the effect data read in step S5005, image control corresponding to this command is performed. For example, image control relating to a display image (notification image, background image) is executed. When this image control process ends, the process returns to step S5002.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub control unit 500 detects the strobe signal output from the first sub control unit 400.

  In step S5101 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the first sub control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

Next, the second sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined by using the timer interrupt as a trigger. Execute in the cycle.

  In step S5201, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S5002 in the second sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. 19A, and the original timer variable storage area is stored. Accordingly, in step S5002, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step S5202, an effect random number update process is performed.

  Next, the image control process in step S5007 in the main process of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

  In step S5301, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the designation of the display areas A and B in the VRAM 536. As a result, an image of one frame stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the effect image display device 157. Next, the CPU 504 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 506), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 536), and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 534 based on the position information table and the like, and then the image from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 536. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 534 transfers the image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 536 based on the command set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 534 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

  In step S5302, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal is input from the VDP 534. If a transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S5303. If not, a transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for it.

  In step S5303, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table and attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 536 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 536 in step S421, the CPU 504 has information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axes and image sizes of the VRAM 536). , VRAM coordinates (placement coordinates), transparency, etc.) are instructed to the VDP 534. The VDP 534 performs parameter setting in accordance with the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

  In step S5304, a drawing instruction is performed. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 534 to start drawing an image. The VDP 534 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer in accordance with an instruction from the CPU 504.

  In step S5305, it is determined whether a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 534 based on the end of image drawing has been input. If a generation end interrupt signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S5306; Wait for input.

  In step S5306, a scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scene images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

<Production control processing>
Next, the effect control process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the effect control process in step S3005 of FIG.

  In step S3301, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is RT2 (AT state) based on the content of the received gaming state command. If the gaming state is RT2 (AT state), the process proceeds to step S3302, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3307.

  In step S3302, it is determined based on the information regarding the number of AT games included in the received gaming state command whether the game is the final game in the AT state. If it is the final game in the AT state, the process proceeds to step S3303. If not, the process proceeds to step S3305.

  In step S3303, based on reception of the start lever operation command, it is determined whether a start lever operation has been performed. If the start lever operation has been performed, the process proceeds to step S3304. If not, the process proceeds to step S3305.

  In step S3304, since the start lever of the final game in the AT state is being operated, a state transition suggestion effect is set. Thereby, the state transition suggestion effect is started, and the insertion image d30 is displayed on the effect image display device 157 (see FIG. 12A-1).

  In step S3305, based on the content of the received internal lottery command, it is determined whether or not an operation order combination (specifically, a small combination 3a) has been internally won. If an internal winning combination is made for the operation order combination, the process proceeds to step S3306; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S3307.

  In step S3306, in the AT state, the operation order combination (specifically, the small combination 3b) has been won internally, so an operation condition notification effect is set. Thereby, the operation order notification effect using the effect image display device 157, the speakers 272, 277, and various lamps 420 is executed, and the operation specifying image d10 is displayed on the effect image display device 157 (FIG. 9B). -1)). The correct operation order is set based on the content of the reel stop data command.

  In step S3307, other effect control processing is performed. For example, when the state transition suggestion effect is being executed in the AT state, the state transition suggestion effect is updated based on the stop operation (first stop operation, second stop operation, third stop operation). Through this state transition suggestion effect update process, the effect image display device 157 displays the inserted image d30 that enlarges and moves the region. In addition, if the correct answer stop operation is performed while the operation condition notification effect is being executed in the AT state, the effect setting for displaying the operation correct image d20 is performed. If the incorrect answer stop operation is performed, the incorrect operation is performed. An effect setting for displaying the image d20a is performed. Thereby, the operation correct answer image d20 is displayed on the effect image display device 157, or the operation incorrect answer image d20a is displayed. In addition, when AT is won in RT1 (normal state), the final game of RT1 (normal state) is set, so a state transition suggesting effect is set. Thereby, the state transition suggestion effect is started, and the inserted image d30 is displayed on the effect image display device 157.

<Other variations>
FIG. 21 is a diagram illustrating a modified example of the operation correct answer image d20. In this embodiment (first embodiment), the size of the operation correct answer image d20 is the same over the display time L1, and the image is larger than the operation specifying image d10. However, the size of the operation correct answer image d20 may not be the same over the entire period of the display time L1, and it may be displayed larger than the operation specific image d10 in at least a part of the display time L1.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 21A, the operation correct answer image d20 displayed smaller than the operation specifying image d10 at the display start time t11 is gradually increased from the time t11 to a time t12 in the middle of the display time L1. The image may be enlarged to be larger than the operation specific image d10, and may be displayed in the same size after time t12. The operation correct image d20 may be more conspicuous than the operation specific image d10. Note that the display mode of the operation correct answer image d20 may be changed while being enlarged while maintaining the mode in which it is understood that the operation is correct.

  In this embodiment, the transparency of the operation correct image d20 is changed from 0% from time t11 to time t12 and from 0% to 100% from time t12 to time t13. However, the change in the transparency of the operation correct image d20 (appearance) is not limited to this, and the operation correct image d20 is clearly (at 0% transparency) in at least a part of the display time L1. Show it. Note that the display mode of the operation correct answer image d20 may be changed while changing the transmittance while maintaining the mode in which the correct operation is recognized.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 21B, the time is changed from 100% to 0% from the display start time t11 to the intermediate time t12, and is changed from 0 to 100% from the time t12 to the display end time t13. Thus, it may be displayed most clearly at time t12. This is because the operation correct image d20 can be made more conspicuous than the operation specifying image d10.

  Further, the step of enlarging the operation correct image d20 shown in FIG. 21A may be combined with the step of changing the transmittance of the operation correct image d20 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 22 is a diagram illustrating a modification of the operation specifying image d10. In the present embodiment, the operation specifying image d10 using numbers is used. However, if the player can grasp the order of the stop operation, it is not necessary to use numbers for the operation specifying image d10.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 22B, the operation order may be notified by the size of the operation specific image d10, and the size of the operation specific image d10 (hereinafter referred to as d10a) corresponding to the next stop operation. You may make it alert | report the order of stop operation by making this larger than the magnitude | size of the operation specific image d10 (henceforth d10b) corresponding to remaining stop operation. Specifically, when the correct stop operation is “left middle right”, as shown in FIG. 22A, before the first stop operation, the operation specifying image d10a corresponding to the left stop button 137 is displayed as the middle stop. The operation specific image d10b corresponding to the button 138 is displayed larger than the operation specific image d10b corresponding to the right stop button 139, and the operation specific image d10a corresponding to the middle stop button 137 is displayed on the right stop after the first stop operation. The operation specific image d10b corresponding to the button 139 is displayed larger.

  In the modification shown in FIG. 22, although the sizes are different, the contents of the operation specific image d10a and the operation specific image d10b are the same (for example, the image of a lord sitting and thinking), but is not limited thereto. The contents may be different.

  Also in the modification shown in FIG. 22, as shown in FIG. 22B, the operation correct image d20 is larger than the operation specifying image d10a in order to make the operation correct image d20 stand out. Note that the operation correct answer image d20 of the modified example shown in FIG. 22 is an image that suggests that each operation is correct (for example, a Tono-like image that stands up and makes a goose sign). Specifically, an animation image is displayed from when the grandfather sitting and thinking stands up and makes a goose sign, and the final display image is larger than the start display image. Of course, the size of the operation correct answer image d20 may be made larger than the size of the operation specifying image d10 during the animation. This is because the operation correct answer image d20 can be made conspicuous.

  Further, the change from the operation specific image d10a to the operation correct answer image d20 is not limited to the above. For example, an option image is added to the operation specific image d10a (such as a flame or aura around the lord sitting and thinking) The operation correct image d20 may be generated by adding an image), and the operation correct image d20 larger than the operation specific image d10a may be displayed. In addition, the operation order may be further clarified by expressing numbers on the operation specifying image d10a using such a character.

  In the present embodiment, the insertion image d30 is gradually enlarged and moved from the top to the bottom of the screen, and the region where the AT background image d2 and the operation correct image d20 are displayed is narrowed. The method for enlarging and moving the region of the insertion image d30 is not limited to this.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 23A, the AT background image d2 and the operation correct answer image d20 are displayed by moving the insertion image d30 by gradually enlarging the region from the four sides of the screen toward the center. The area may be narrowed. This is because the operation correct answer image d20 can be emphasized and made conspicuous also in this case. In FIG. 23, A20 indicates a region where the operation correct answer image d20 is displayed. The display area ratio between the AT background image d2 and the operation correct image d20 increases the ratio of the operation correct image d20 for each operation, so that the player does not show a sudden change, and the player likes In some cases, the operation can be interrupted when the area ratio is reached.

  Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 23B, first, the insertion image d30 is moved from the four sides of the screen toward the center while gradually expanding the area, whereby the AT background image d2 and the operation correct image d20. Next, the area of the normal background image d1, which is the next background image, is gradually enlarged from the top to the bottom of the screen and moved, so that the insertion image d30 and the operation correct image d20 are displayed. You may make it narrow the area | region where is displayed. That is, in the present embodiment, the AT background image d2 and the normal background image d1 are not displayed simultaneously on the same screen, but the AT background image d2 and the normal background image d1 may be displayed simultaneously. . Of course, the area of the AT background image d2 is gradually reduced, while the area of the normal background image d1 is gradually enlarged, and finally the normal background image d1 is displayed. Also in this case, the operation correct answer image d20 can be emphasized and made conspicuous.

  From the above, as long as the inserted image d30 includes an image that moves toward the region A20 where the operation correct image d20 is displayed, any moving mode may be adopted. This is because the background image outside the display area A20 of the operation correct image d20 is narrowed, and the operation correct image d20 can be emphasized and made conspicuous.

  Further, in this embodiment, the correct operation order when the internal winning combination for the operation order is set from the first stop operation to the third stop operation, but the correct operation order is set only for the first stop operation. May be. Then, when an internal winning combination is made for an operation order in which an operation condition is set for such a first stop operation, an operation condition notification effect suggesting the content of the correct first stop operation may be executed. .

  For example, when the first stop operation with respect to the right stop button 139 is a correct operation, as shown in FIG. 24A, the operation specifying image d10 indicating the contents of the first stop operation (for example, from right to left) And a voice indicating the content of the first stop operation (for example, a voice such as “push from right”) is output using the speakers 272 and 277, and various lamps 420 are used to Illumination / flashing indicating the content of the first stop operation (for example, lighting / flashing the right side lamp 144) is performed. If the first stop operation is correct, the operation specifying image d10 is deleted, and the operation correct answer indicating that the first stop operation is correct is displayed in the area where the operation specifying image d10 is displayed. An image d20 (for example, an image in which characters such as OK are written in a frame having a predetermined shape) is displayed. Also in this case, since the operation correct image d20 is displayed larger than the operation specifying image d10, the operation correct image d20 can be emphasized and made conspicuous.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, although it was set as the operation condition alerting | reporting effect which alert | reports the order of stop operation, it is good also as the operation condition alerting | reporting effect which alert | reports the symbol of the internal winning combination.

  For example, when the operation condition notification effect is executed in the case of the internal winning of the small role 2 (cherry) in the AT state, as shown in FIG. 24B, the operation specifying image d10 indicating the symbol of the internal winning character is shown. (For example, cherry image) is displayed, and the speaker 272, 277 is used to output a sound (for example, a sound such as “cherry”) indicating the symbol of the winning combination, and various lamps 420 are used. The color (for example, red) indicating the symbol of the winning combination is turned on. When the operation timing is suitable and the cherry symbol is displayed on the winning line, the operation specific image d10 is deleted, and the operation timing is correct in the area where the operation specific image d10 is displayed. Is displayed (for example, an image in which characters such as OK are written in a frame of a predetermined shape). Also in this case, since the operation correct image d20 is displayed larger than the operation specifying image d10, the operation correct image d20 can be emphasized and made conspicuous.

  FIG. 25 is a diagram illustrating a modified example of the operation incorrect answer image d20a displayed when the operation is incorrect in the operation condition notification effect. Specifically, in the AT state, when the small combination 3a is internally won and the reel stop data d1 is selected, the player performs an incorrect answer stop operation (the first stop operation for the right stop button 139). The transition of the operation condition notification effect at the time is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 25, the operation incorrect image d20a may be displayed smaller than the operation specific image d10 (not shown, but also in this modification, the operation correct image d20 is larger than the operation specific image d10). Is displayed). Here, FIG. 25 (a-2) is a display when the first stop operation is performed not on the left stop button 137 but on the middle stop button 138 or the right stop button 139, and FIG. 25 (a-4). Is a display when the second stop operation is performed on the remaining stop buttons, and FIG. 25A-6 is a display when the third stop operation is performed on the remaining stop buttons.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 25, not all the operation specific images d10 are displayed (see FIG. 11), but only the operation specific images d10 corresponding to the remaining stop operations may be displayed. In this modified example, the operation specifying image d10 is displayed relatively larger than the operation incorrect answer image d20a, so that the remaining stop operation of the game is used as an exercise for preventing the operation failure provided for the next game and thereafter. be able to.

  In the AT state, information d40 such as the number of AT games may be displayed as an AT effect. FIG. 26 shows a case where such information d40 is displayed in a game that executes a state transition suggestion effect.

  FIG. 26A shows the transition of the effect image of the final game G1 in the normal state. In this case, after the third stop operation, the inserted image d30 covers the entire screen, and the display of the AT game number d40 is started when the final game G1 in the normal state is finished (FIG. 26 (a-5)). reference). Information d40 indicating the number of AT games (for example, “AT01th”, etc.) is displayed against the background of an inserted image d30 of a plain color scheme (repetitive pattern color scheme), so that the player can easily grasp the number of AT games. it can. In this way, when shifting from the normal state to the AT state, the number of AT games is started at the timing when the inserted image d30 covers the entire screen. During the AT state, the number of AT games is updated and displayed after the third stop operation is performed.

  On the other hand, FIG. 26B shows the transition of the effect image in the case where the internal winning combination for the operation order is performed in the final game G2 in the normal state and the correct stop operation is performed. In this case, after the third stop operation, the inserted image d30 covers the entire screen, and information d40 indicating that the AT state has ended when the final game G2 in the AT state has ended (for example, “END” or the like) (Refer to FIG. 26 (b-6)). Since the information d40 indicating the number of AT games (for example, “END”, etc.) is displayed against the background of the plain color-inserted image d30, the player can easily grasp the change in the AT gaming state. Although not shown, since the next game is in a normal state, the background image of the next game is the normal background image d1.

  In FIG. 26, the number of AT games is displayed as information d40. However, the information d40 is not limited to this, and other numerical values related to the game (for example, the number of AT sets, the winning of a specific small role) Or the like) may be displayed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the state transition suggestion effect is executed when the AT gaming state changes, but in addition to this, even when the AT gaming state does not change, a predetermined transition is performed. When the condition is satisfied (for example, when winning a lottery effect performed every game. After a decision to change to the AT gaming state, and in a plurality of games before changing to the AT gaming state, The state transition suggestion effect may be executed in the case of executing as Even if the gaming state does not change, the state transition suggestion effect can be shown to the player, so that it is possible to increase the opportunity to improve the expectation for the change of the AT gaming state. FIG. 27A shows the flow of the state transition suggestion effect executed when the normal state is maintained, and FIG. 27B shows the flow of the state transition suggestion effect executed when the AT state is maintained. Yes.

  Thus, even when the AT gaming state does not change, the state transition suggestion effect may be executed to improve the interest of the player.

  Further, in this embodiment, the “blade” that moves from the upper side to the lower side of the screen is set as the inserted image d30, but it is needless to say that another image may be used as the inserted image d30. For example, as shown in FIG. 28, “shoji” may be used as the inserted image d30.

  FIG. 28A shows a state transition suggesting effect in the final game G2 in the AT state in which the AT background image d2 is displayed, and FIG. 28B shows an AT state in which the AT background image d2 is displayed. State transition suggestion effect when the player performs a correct stop operation (stop operation in the middle left and right) in the case where the small combination 3a is internally won in the final game G2 and the reel stop data d1 is selected And the operation condition notification effect is shown.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 28A, the “shoji” as the inserted image d30 moves from the left side of the screen toward the right side, but only moves from the left end of the screen to the distance W11. . Then, as shown in FIG. 28B, the operation specifying image d10 and the operation correct answer image d20 of the operation condition notification effect are displayed further to the right than the position of the distance W11 from the left end of the screen. Even when the operation condition notification effect is executed simultaneously, the inserted image d30 does not interfere with the operation specifying image d10 and the operation correct image d20.

  Although not shown, when only the operation condition notification effect is executed in the AT state, the operation specifying image d10 and the operation correct answer image d20 are displayed at a predetermined size B1 in the center of the screen (operation condition notification). The effect operation specifying image d10 and the operation correct image d20 are displayed at the position (reference display position) shown in FIG. 9 when the insertion image d30 is not displayed. On the other hand, when the operation condition notification effect and the operation condition notification effect are simultaneously executed in the AT state, as shown in FIG. 28B, the operation specifying image d10 and the operation correct image d20 are displayed on the right side of the screen. The display is performed in a size B2 smaller than the size B1 (the operation specifying image d10 and the operation correct image d20 of the operation condition notification effect do not overlap with the insertion image d30 when the insertion image d30 is displayed. It is displayed at the displayed position (evacuation display position), and further, the display is reduced in a unified manner so that the visual impression does not change).

  As described above, even when the moving direction of the inserted image d30 is the left-right direction, the region of the inserted image d30 is enlarged and approaches the operation correct image d20, and the operation correct image d20 is displayed larger than the operation specifying image d10. Thus, the operation correct answer image d20 can be emphasized and made conspicuous. Note that the moving direction of the insertion image d30 is not limited to the vertical direction or the horizontal direction, and may be an oblique direction. In this case as well, the same display can be performed to highlight the operation correct answer image d20 and make it stand out.

  In the game in which the state transition suggestion effect and the operation condition notification effect shown in FIG. 28 are executed simultaneously, the operation specifying image d10 is displayed at the right end of the screen from the beginning (after the start lever operation) (FIG. 28). In this case, it may be difficult to grasp the contents of the operation specific image d10. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 29, after the start lever is operated, it is displayed in a large size (displayed with a size B1). (See FIG. 29 (a-1)), when a minute time Δt (for example, about 0.05 seconds) has elapsed, a small display (displayed with a size B2) is displayed on the right end of the screen (FIG. 29 (a-)). See 5). In this case, the player can easily grasp the content of the correct stop operation.

  Note that the change of the operation specific image d10 is preferably a moving image that gradually decreases during the minute time Δt (see FIGS. 29A-2 to 29A-4). This is to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

[Second Embodiment]
In the first embodiment, the operation correct image d20 is displayed larger than the operation specifying image d10 so that the operation correct image d20 is more conspicuous. However, in this embodiment (second embodiment), the operation specifying image is displayed. The image d10 is displayed larger than the operation correct image d20 so that the operation specific image d10 is more conspicuous.

  In the following description, the configuration, function, and processing different from those of the first embodiment will be mainly described, and the other components, function, and processing will be denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 30A is a diagram illustrating a notification mode of the operation condition notification effect of the present embodiment. In the operation condition notification effect of the present embodiment, the operation specifying image d10 indicating the order of the correct stop operation is displayed on the effect image display device 157, and the order of the correct stop operation is displayed using the speakers 272 and 277. (For example, when the next stop operation is the left stop button 137, a sound such as “left”) is output, and various lamps 420 are used to light and blink (for example, the order of the correct stop operation) If the next stop operation is the left stop button 137, the left side lamp 144 is turned on and blinked).

  In the present embodiment, the operation specific image d10 for the next stop operation is displayed larger than the operation specific image d10 for the remaining stop operations so as to stand out. Hereinafter, for the sake of convenience, the operation specific image displayed in a large size is expressed as d10B, and the operation specific image having a normal size is expressed as d10.

  In the operation condition notification effect, (1) when the player performs a correct stop operation, the operation specifying image d10 corresponding to the stop operation that has been performed is deleted, and each stop operation is correct. While the operation correct answer image d20 suggesting that the stop operation is incorrect, (2) when the player performs an incorrect answer stop operation, the operation incorrect answer image d20a suggesting that each stop operation is incorrect is displayed. indicate. In the present embodiment, the operation specifying image d10B is displayed larger than the operation correct image d20.

  FIG. 30B shows a case where the small combination 3a is internally won in the AT state and the reel stop data d1 is selected, and the player performs a correct stop operation (left middle right stop operation). The transition of the effect image of the operation condition notification effect is shown.

  FIG. 30B-1 shows the display mode of the effect image display device 157 after the start lever operation. The slot machine 100 displays the operation specific image d10 based on the start lever operation. Specifically, when the correct stop operation is “left middle right”, the operation specifying image d10B in which a number 1 is written in the square frame at the center lower position of the screen, The operation specifying image d10 in which a number of 2 is written and the operation specifying image d10 in which a number of 3 is written in a square frame are displayed from the left in accordance with the positions of the stop buttons 137 to 139. As described above, the operation specifying image d10b in which the number 1 is written is displayed larger than the operation specifying image d10 in which 2 and 3 are written. As a result, the player determines that the first stop operation is an operation for the left stop button 137, the second stop operation is an operation for the middle stop button 138, and the third stop operation is a right stop button 139 based on the sequence of the numbers in the operation specific image d10. Know that this is an operation.

  FIG. 30B-2 shows the display mode of the effect image display device 157 after the first stop operation. In FIG. 30 (b-2), since the player operates the left stop button 137 as a first stop operation, and this first stop operation is correct, the slot machine 100 performs an operation corresponding to the first stop operation. The specific image d10B is deleted, and the operation correct image d20 suggesting that the first stop operation is correct is displayed at the position where the operation specific image d10 corresponding to the first stop operation was displayed. Specifically, the operation correct image d20 is a graphic image having a shape representing explosion / rupture. In the present embodiment, the size of the operation correct answer image d20 is substantially the same as the size of the operation specifying image d10. Further, since the next stop operation is the second stop operation, the slot machine 100 enlarges and displays the operation specific image d10 corresponding to the second stop operation as the operation specific image d10B.

  FIG. 30B-3 shows a display mode of the effect image display device 157 after the operation correct image d20 displayed based on the first stop operation disappears (after the display time L1 has elapsed). At this time, the slot machine 100 continuously displays the operation specifying images d10B and d10 related to the remaining stop operations (second stop operation and third stop operation) as the operation condition notification effect.

  FIG. 30 (b-4) shows the display mode of the effect image display device 157 after the second stop operation. In FIG. 30 (b-4), since the player performed the operation on the middle stop button 138 as the second stop operation and the second stop operation was correct, the slot machine 100 specifies the operation corresponding to the second stop operation. The image d10B is deleted, and the operation correct image d20 that suggests that the second stop operation is correct is displayed at the position where the operation specific image d10B corresponding to the second stop operation was displayed. Further, since the next stop operation is the third stop operation, the slot machine 100 enlarges and displays the operation specific image d10 corresponding to the third stop operation as the operation specific image d10B.

  FIG. 30 (b-5) shows a display mode of the output image display device 157 after the operation correct image d20 displayed based on the second stop operation disappears (after the display time L1 has elapsed). At this time, the slot machine 100 displays the operation specifying image d10 regarding the remaining stop operation (third stop operation) as the operation condition notification effect.

  FIG. 30 (b-6) shows a display mode of the effect image display device 157 after the third stop operation. In FIG. 30 (b-6), since the player performed the operation on the right stop button 139 as the third stop operation and the third stop operation was correct, the slot machine 100 specifies the operation corresponding to the third stop operation. The image d10B is erased, and the operation correct image d20 suggesting that the third stop operation is correct is displayed at the position where the operation specific image d10B corresponding to the third stop operation was displayed.

  FIG. 30 (b-7) shows a display mode of the effect image display device 157 after the operation correct image d20 displayed based on the third stop operation disappears (after the display time L1 has elapsed). At this time, since the operation condition notification effect has ended, the slot machine 100 displays only the AT background image d2.

  FIG. 31 (a) summarizes the relationship between the gaming operations described above and the operation specifying images d10 and d10B in a time chart. Thus, when the correct answer of the first stop operation is an operation on the left stop button 137, the operation specifying image d10 marked “1” for the left stop button 137 from the time t21 of the start lever operation is largely displayed as d10B. If the correct answer to the second stop operation is an operation on the middle stop button 138, the operation specifying image d10 marked “2” on the middle stop button 138 from the time t22 of the first stop operation is displayed large as d10B. When the correct answer to the third stop operation is an operation on the right stop button 139, the operation specifying image d10 marked “3” for the right stop button 139 is displayed as d10B from the time t24 of the second stop operation. To do.

  Thereby, since the content of the correct stop operation is displayed in an enlarged manner, the player can easily and clearly grasp the content of the next stop operation.

  FIG. 31B is a diagram illustrating a state where the operation specifying image d10 indicated by 2 corresponding to the second stop operation is changed to d10B. Specifically, based on the first stop operation, the operation specifying image d10 indicated by 2 has a predetermined time L4 (about 0.1 second in the present embodiment) starting from the center coordinates of the operation specifying image d10. In short, the operation specific image d10B is enlarged.

  As described above, the operation condition notification effect of the present embodiment not only displays the operation specific image d10 to notify the player of advantageous operation contents, but also displays the operation specific image d10B corresponding to the next stop operation as another operation. Since it is displayed larger than the specific image d10 and the operation correct answer image d20 and emphasized, the player can more easily recognize the recommended next stop operation.

  Note that the operation specific image d10 is displayed as a moving image (for example, the operation specific image d10 is displayed as an enemy character as part of the effect of defeating the enemy character), and the pre-enlargement video and the post-enlargement video are differentiated. (For example, an animation in which an enemy character prepares a weapon before enlargement and a movie in which an enemy character wears a weapon after enlargement) may be used. In some cases, it may be easier to recognize that the size has changed.

  In the present embodiment, the enlarged operation specific image d10B is displayed so as not to overlap with the adjacent operation specific image d10, but may be displayed so as to overlap. However, in this case, in order to make the operation specific image d10B stand out, the operation specific image d10B is displayed in front of the operation specific image d10.

  In the present embodiment, the enlarged operation specifying image d10B is displayed while maintaining the size as it is, but is not limited thereto. For example, the operation specific image d10B once enlarged may be reduced, or enlargement / reduction between the operation specific image d10 and the operation specific image d10B may be repeated. That is, it is only necessary that the operation specific image d10B is displayed in at least a part of the display time L1. This is because the operation specific image d10B can be made conspicuous.

  FIG. 32 shows a case where the small combination 3a is internally won in the AT state and the reel stop data d1 is selected, and the player performs an incorrect answer stop operation (the first stop operation is an operation on the right stop button 139). The transition of the operation condition notification effect when performed is shown. Hereinafter, the difference from the correct stop operation will be mainly described.

  FIG. 32 (a-2) shows the display mode of the effect image display device 157 after the first stop operation. In FIG. 32 (a-2), since the player operates the right stop button 139 as the first stop operation, and the first stop operation is incorrect, the slot machine 100 is located above the operation specific images d10B and d10. In addition, an operation incorrect image d20a suggesting that the first stop operation was incorrect is displayed in the center of the screen, and an operation specifying image d10 corresponding to the first stop operation is continuously displayed.

  Here, the operation incorrect answer image d20a is a graphic image in which a failure character is written in a rectangular frame, and is an image that disappears after a predetermined time L1 from the start of display, like the operation correct answer image d20. That is, in this embodiment, the operation incorrect image d20a is displayed at a position different from the position where the operation correct image d20 was displayed, that is, the position where the operation specifying image d10B corresponding to the first stop operation was displayed. .

  FIG. 32 (a-3) shows a display mode of the effect image display device 157 after the operation incorrect image d20 displayed based on the first stop operation disappears (after the display time L1 has elapsed). At this time, the slot machine 100 displays the operation specifying images d10B and d10 related to all stop operations (first stop operation, second stop operation, and third stop operation).

  32 (a-4) shows the display mode of the effect image display device 157 after the second stop operation, and FIG. 32 (a-6) shows the display mode of the effect image display device 157 after the third stop operation. Yes. Since the correct operation sequence of the present embodiment is so-called “6 choices”, if the first stop operation is incorrect, the second stop operation and the third stop operation are incorrect. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 32 (a-4) and (a-6), the slot machine 100 does not perform the second stop operation and the third stop operation after the second stop operation and after the third stop operation, respectively. The operation incorrect answer image d20a suggesting that the answer is correct is displayed above the operation specifying images d10B and d10 and in the center of the screen.

  As described above, the operation condition notification effect according to the present embodiment displays the operation incorrect answer image d20a every time an incorrect answer operation is performed, thereby notifying that the operation is incorrect. Can easily recognize that an incorrect operation has been performed.

  In the present embodiment, the same operation incorrect answer image d20a is displayed for each stop operation, but the present invention is not limited to this. Different operation incorrect images d20a may be displayed for each stop operation. For example, when the first stop operation fails, the largest operation incorrect answer image d20a among the three operation incorrect answer images d20a is displayed, and when the second stop operation fails, the three operation incorrect answer images are displayed. The second largest operation incorrect answer image d20a is displayed in d20a, and when the third stop operation fails, the smallest operation incorrect answer image d20a among the three operation incorrect answer images d20a is displayed. Good. This is because the first stop operation is most important for the player.

  In this embodiment, the operation incorrect image d20a based on the third stop operation and the operation specific image d10 have the same erasure timing (FIGS. 32 (a-6) and (a-7)), but this is not limitative. Not. For example, the operation specifying image d10 may be deleted before the operation incorrect answer image d20a. In this case, even if the operation specifying image d10 is deleted, the operation incorrect answer image d20a is displayed, so that the player may be impressed that there was an incorrect operation. Further, for example, the operation incorrect image d20a may be deleted before the operation specifying image d10. In this case, since the operation specifying image d10 is displayed even if the operation incorrect answer image d20a is deleted, it is possible to strongly impress the player on the correct stop operation order, and attention to the next operation condition notification effect. It may be possible to encourage arousal.

  Next, a case where the operation condition notification effect and the state transition suggestion effect are executed in the same game will be described. In the present embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment, when the operation condition notification effect and the state transition suggestion effect are executed at the same time, the operations of the effects are the same as those performed independently. In other words, both the operation condition notification effect and the state transition suggestion effect have the same effect data when executed independently and when both effects are executed. Is set in consideration of the case where both effects are executed simultaneously.

  FIG. 33 shows a case where the small role 3a is internally won in the final game G2 in the AT state, and the reel stop data d1 is selected, and the player has performed the correct stop operation (stop operation on the left middle right). The change of the production image (operation specific image d10, d10B, operation correct image d20) of the operation condition notification effect at the time and the insertion image d30 of the state transition suggestion effect is shown.

  FIG. 33 (a-1) shows the display mode of the effect image display device 157 after the start lever operation. After the start lever operation, the slot machine 100 displays the operation specific image d10B corresponding to the first stop operation and the operation specific image d10 corresponding to the remaining stop operation on the AT background image d2 based on the start lever operation. . In addition, after the start lever operation, the slot machine 100 starts displaying the insertion image d30 based on the start lever operation, and enlarges and moves the region of the insertion image d30 from the top to the bottom of the screen.

  The slot machine 100 stops the movement of the insertion image d30 when the predetermined time L2 has elapsed after the start lever operation, and thereafter continuously displays the insertion image d30 whose movement has been stopped.

  FIG. 33 (a-2) shows the display mode of the effect image display device 157 after the first stop operation. Based on the first stop operation, the slot machine 100 displays the operation correct image d20 at the position where the operation specific image d10 corresponding to the first stop operation is displayed, and further enlarges the area of the insertion image d30 downward. Let Further, the slot machine 100 enlarges and displays the operation specific image d10 corresponding to the second stop operation as the operation specific image d10B.

  The slot machine 100 stops the movement of the insertion image d30 when the predetermined time L2 has elapsed after the first stop operation, and thereafter continuously displays the insertion image d30 whose movement has been stopped.

  FIG. 33A-3 shows a display mode of the effect image display device 157 after the operation correct image d20 displayed based on the first stop operation disappears (after the display time L1 has elapsed).

  FIG. 33 (a-4) shows the display mode of the effect image display device 157 after the second stop operation. Based on the second stop operation, the slot machine 100 displays the operation correct image d20 at the position where the operation specific image d10 corresponding to the second stop operation is displayed, and further expands the area of the insertion image d30 downward. Let Further, the slot machine 100 enlarges and displays the operation specific image d10 corresponding to the third stop operation as the operation specific image d10B.

  The slot machine 100 stops the movement of the insertion image d30 when the predetermined time L2 has elapsed after the second stop operation, and thereafter continuously displays the insertion image d30 whose movement has been stopped.

  FIG. 33 (a-5) shows the display mode of the effect image display device 157 after the operation correct image d20 displayed based on the second stop operation disappears (after the display time L1 has elapsed).

  FIG. 33 (a-6) shows the display mode of the effect image display device 157 after the third stop operation. Based on the third stop operation, the slot machine 100 displays the operation correct image d20 at the position where the operation specific image d10 corresponding to the third stop operation was displayed, and further expands the area of the insertion image d30 downward. Let

  The slot machine 100 stops the movement of the insertion image d30 when the predetermined time L2 has elapsed after the third stop operation, and thereafter continuously displays the insertion image d30 whose movement has been stopped.

  FIG. 33 (a-7) shows a display mode of the effect image display device 157 when the enlargement movement of the insertion image d30 based on the third stop operation is finished. The effect image display device 157 is the entire surface of the insertion image d30. Covered. When the predetermined time L3 has elapsed from this state, the slot machine 100 deletes the inserted image d30 and displays a normal background image d1 indicating the normal state on the effect image display device 157 (not shown). . As a result, the player can grasp that the normal state is reached from the change of the background image.

  Also in this embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the inserted image d30 (see FIG. 14) immediately before the third stop operation does not hide the operation specifying image d10B for the third stop operation. The player can be surely notified of the contents of the operation specific image d10 related to the stop operation.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the operation condition notification effect and the state transition suggestion effect are executed at the same time, the insertion image d30 is directed toward the operation specifying images d10 and d10B and the operation correct image d20 as shown in FIG. The enlarged movement gives the impression that the peripheral area of the operation specific images d10 and d10B has become narrow, and the operation specific image d10 corresponding to the next stop operation is enlarged and displayed as the operation specific image d10B. The specific image d10B can be emphasized and made conspicuous.

<Other variations>
In the present embodiment (second embodiment), the operation specifying images d10 and d10B and the operation correct image d20 are images of different materials. However, the operation specifying images d10 and d10B and the operation correct image d20 may be expressed using the same material. For example, as shown in FIG. 34A, an operation correct image d20 may be an image in which the operation specifying image d10B is reduced while rotating. In this case, the display time L1 of the operation correct image d20 is a time during which the operation specifying image d10B is reduced while rotating. Since the operation specific images d10 and d10B and the operation correct answer image d20 are expressed using the same material, the data capacity of the image can be reduced.

  FIG. 34 (b) shows a case where the small combination 3a is internally won in the final game G2 in the AT state of this modification and the reel stop data d1 is selected, and the player performs the correct stop operation (left middle right The change in the operation condition notification effect effect images d10 and d10B and the state transition suggestion effect insertion image d30 when the operation (stop operation) is performed is shown.

  34 (b-2) shows the effect image display device 157 after the first stop operation, FIG. 34 (b-4) shows the second stop operation, and FIG. 34 (b-6) shows the third stop operation. The display modes are respectively shown. As shown in FIGS. 34 (a-2), (a-4), and (a-6), the operation specifying image d10B corresponding to the stop operation that has been performed is reduced while being rotated to obtain an operation correct image d20. Good. The player can grasp that the stop operation is correct from the display change mode of the operation specific image d10B.

  In addition, you may make it combine the structure of the said 1st Embodiment and 2nd Embodiment. In other words, both the operation specifying image d10 and the operation correct answer image d20 may be displayed in a large size so that both the operation specifying image d10 and the operation correct answer image d20 are conspicuous.

-Operation of Inserted Image d30 In the second embodiment, when the execution condition of the state transition suggesting effect is satisfied, the insert image d30 “SUBARU” is displayed on the background image from the top to the bottom of the screen every time a game operation is performed. The display image gradually hangs down and gradually covers the background image to enlarge the display area, but the operation of the inserted image d30 is not limited to this. For example, each time a game operation is performed, the insert image d30 “sudabana” gradually hangs down from the top of the screen toward the bottom and then gradually rises from the bottom to the top of the screen. It may move (Modification A).

  FIG. 35 is a diagram illustrating a change in the insertion image d30 displayed on the effect image display device 157 in the state transition suggestion effect according to Modification A. FIG. 35 shows a state transition suggestion effect in the final game in the AT state in which the AT background image d2 is displayed.

  FIG. 35A-1 shows the display mode of the effect image display device 157 before the start lever operation, and FIG. 35A-2 shows the display mode of the effect image display device 157 after the start lever operation. The slot machine 100 starts displaying the insertion image d30 based on the start lever operation, and enlarges and moves the area of the insertion image d30 from the top to the bottom of the screen. Then, when a predetermined time L2 (about 0.1 second) has elapsed after the start lever operation, the movement of the insertion image d30 is stopped, and the insertion image d30 is displayed in about 1/3 of the display area of the effect image display device 157. To do. Thereafter, the insertion image d30 whose movement has been stopped is continuously displayed. Note that the lower limit position of “blade” that is the inserted image d30 when the predetermined time L2 has elapsed after the start lever operation is also referred to as a first position, and this state is the case where the inserted image d30 is in the first state. This is also referred to (state shown in FIG. 35 (a-2)).

  FIGS. 35 (a-3) and (a-4) show the display mode of the effect image display device 157 after the first stop operation. The slot machine 100 further enlarges and moves the region of the insertion image d30 in the first state downward based on the first stop operation. Then, after the first stop operation, the movement of the insertion image d30 is stopped when a predetermined time L2 (about 0.1 seconds) has elapsed, and the insertion image d30 is reduced to about 2/3 of the display area of the effect image display device 157. Display (time t1). Note that the lower limit position of the “blade” that is the inserted image d30 at the time point t1 is also referred to as a second position, and this state is also referred to as the case where the inserted image d30 is in the second state (FIG. 35A-3). State). Thereafter, the slot machine 100 reduces and moves the region of the insertion image d30 in the second state upward. Then, when the predetermined time L2 (about 0.1 second) has elapsed from the time point t1, the movement of the insertion image d30 is stopped, and the insertion image d30 is displayed in about ３ of the display area of the effect image display device 157 ( Time t2). That is, the insertion image d30 at the time point t2 is in the first state (the state shown in FIG. 35 (a-4)). Thereafter, the insertion image d30 whose movement has been stopped is continuously displayed.

  FIGS. 35 (a-5) and (a-6) show the display mode of the effect image display device 157 after the second stop operation. The slot machine 100 enlarges and moves the region of the insertion image d30 in the first state downward based on the second stop operation. Then, after the first stop operation, the movement of the insertion image d30 is stopped when a predetermined time L2 (about 0.1 seconds) has elapsed, and the insertion image d30 is reduced to about 2/3 of the display area of the effect image display device 157. Display (time t3). That is, the insertion image d30 at the time point t3 is in the second state (the state shown in FIG. 35 (a-5)). Thereafter, the slot machine 100 reduces and moves the region of the insertion image d30 in the second state upward. Then, when the predetermined time L2 has elapsed from time t3, the movement of the insertion image d30 is stopped, and the insertion image d30 is displayed in about 1/3 of the display area of the effect image display device 157 (time t4). That is, the insertion image d30 at the time point t4 is in the first state (the state shown in FIG. 35 (a-6)). Thereafter, the insertion image d30 whose movement has been stopped is continuously displayed.

  FIGS. 35 (a-7) and (a-8) show the display mode of the effect image display device 157 after the third stop operation. The slot machine 100 enlarges and moves the region of the insertion image d30 in the first state downward based on the third stop operation. When a predetermined time L2 (about 0.1 second) has elapsed after the third stop operation, the effect image display device 157 is entirely covered with the insertion image d30. When the predetermined time L3 has elapsed from this state, the slot machine 100 deletes the inserted image d30 and displays the normal background image d1 indicating the normal state on the effect image display device 157. As a result, the player can grasp that the normal state is reached from the change of the background image.

  As described above, the movement of the insertion image d30 based on the game operation may be a reciprocating motion in which the area of the insertion image d30 is enlarged or reduced. The amount of movement of the single insertion image d30 may be larger than the amount of movement of the single insertion image d30 in the second embodiment.

  In the modification A, the lower limit position of the “blade” in the second position is set to a position that covers about 2/3 of the display area of the effect image display device 157, but the second position is not limited to this. The inserted image d30 may cover the entire display area of the effect image display device 157. That is, the effect image display device 157 may be entirely covered with the insertion image d30 every time the stop operation is performed.

  Next, in Modification A, the case where the operation condition notification effect and the state transition suggestion effect are executed in the same game will be described. Also in this modification, when the operation condition notification effect and the state transition suggestion effect are executed at the same time, the operations of the effects are the same as those executed independently.

  FIG. 36 shows a case where the small role 3a is internally won in the final game G2 in the AT state, and the reel stop data d1 is selected, and the player performs a correct stop operation (stop operation on the left middle right). The change of the production image (operation specific image d10, d10B, operation correct image d20) of the operation condition notification effect at the time and the insertion image d30 of the state transition suggestion effect is shown.

  36 (a-1) shows the display mode of the effect image display device 157 before the start lever operation, and FIG. 36 (a-2) shows the display mode of the effect image display device 157 after the start lever operation. After the start lever operation, the slot machine 100 displays an enlarged operation specific image d10B corresponding to the first stop operation on the AT background image d2 and an operation specific image d10 corresponding to the remaining stop operations based on the start lever operation. Start displaying. Also, the slot machine 100 starts displaying the insertion image d30 based on the start lever operation, expands and moves the area of the insertion image d30 from the top to the bottom of the screen, and the lower limit reaches the first position. The movement of the insertion image d30 is stopped. Thereafter, the insertion image d30 in the first state is continuously displayed.

  36 (a-3) and (a-4) show the display mode of the effect image display device 157 after the first stop operation. FIG. 36 (a-3) shows a case where the insertion image d30 is in the second state, and FIG. 36 (a-4) shows a case where the insertion image d30 is in the first state.

  Based on the first stop operation, the slot machine 100 displays the operation correct image d20 at the position where the operation specific image d10 corresponding to the first stop operation was displayed and the operation specific image d10 corresponding to the second stop operation. Is enlarged and displayed as the operation specific image d10B (state shown in FIG. 36A-3). Further, the slot machine 100 expands and moves the region of the insertion image d30 in the first state downward based on the first stop operation to the second state (the state of FIG. 36 (a-3)). Thereafter, the region of the insertion image d30 in the second state is reduced and moved upward to bring the insertion image d30 into the first state (state shown in FIG. 36 (a-4)). Thereafter, the insertion image d30 in the first state is continuously displayed.

  36 (a-5) and (a-6) show the display mode of the effect image display device 157 after the second stop operation. FIG. 36 (a-5) shows a case where the insertion image d30 is in the second state, and FIG. 36 (a-6) shows a case where the insertion image d30 is in the first state.

  Based on the second stop operation, the slot machine 100 displays the operation correct image d20 at the position where the operation specific image d10 corresponding to the second stop operation was displayed and the operation specific image d10 corresponding to the third stop operation. Is enlarged and displayed as the operation specific image d10B (state shown in FIG. 36 (a-5)). Further, the slot machine 100 enlarges and moves the region of the insertion image d30 in the first state downward based on the second stop operation to the second state (the state of FIG. 36 (a-5)). Thereafter, the region of the insertion image d30 in the second state is reduced and moved upward to bring the insertion image d30 into the first state (the state shown in FIG. 36 (a-6)). Thereafter, the insertion image d30 in the first state is continuously displayed. The operation of the inserted image d30 is the same as the operation based on the first stop operation.

  36 (a-7) and (a-8) show the display mode of the effect image display device 157 after the third stop operation. Based on the third stop operation, the slot machine 100 displays the operation correct image d20 at the position where the operation specific image d10 corresponding to the third stop operation was displayed, and the inserted image d30 in the first state. The area is enlarged and moved downward, and the entire screen is entirely covered with the insertion image d30 (state shown in FIG. 36 (a-7)). When the predetermined time L3 has elapsed from this state, the slot machine 100 deletes the inserted image d30 and displays a normal background image d1 indicating the normal state on the effect image display device 157 (FIG. 36 (a-)). 8) state).

  As described above, when the operation condition notification effect and the state transition suggestion effect are simultaneously executed in the modified example A, the insertion image d30 is enlarged and moved toward the operation specifying images d10 and 10B, and the peripheral regions of the operation specifying images d10 and d10B are While giving the impression that it became narrow, since operation specific image d10 corresponding to the next stop operation is enlarged and displayed as operation specific image d10B, operation specific image d10B can be emphasized and made conspicuous. Particularly, in Modification A, since the amount of movement of one insertion image d30 is larger than that in the second embodiment, the operation specifying image d10B can be more emphasized and made conspicuous.

  In Modification A, as shown in FIGS. 36 (a-3) and (a-5), when the display area of the operation specific images d10 and 10B and the display area of the insertion image d30 overlap, the operation specific image Since d10B is displayed in the foreground, the operation specific image 10B can be made conspicuous.

  In the modification A, one reciprocal movement is performed for each stop operation, that is, one reciprocation accompanied by enlargement and reduction of the inserted image d30. However, the reciprocating movement with expansion and contraction of the insertion image d30 based on the game operation is not limited to one time. For example, the reciprocating movement with expansion and contraction of the insertion image d30 may be repeatedly performed a plurality of times based on the gaming operation (Modification A1). By repeatedly performing the reciprocating movement with the enlargement and reduction of the insertion image d30 a plurality of times, the player comes to pay attention to the background image and the operation specific images d10 and d10B shielded by the insertion image d30.

  FIG. 37 is a diagram illustrating a change in the insertion image d30 displayed on the effect image display device 157 in the state transition suggestion effect according to the modification A1. FIG. 37 shows a state transition suggestion effect in the final game in the AT state in which the AT background image d2 is displayed.

  FIG. 37 shows a case where the reciprocating movement with the enlargement and reduction of the insertion image d30 is repeated until the third stop operation based on the start lever operation. It should be noted that the operation condition notification effect and the state transition suggestion effect are executed in the same game in the modified example A1, and for example, the reciprocating movement with the enlargement and reduction of the inserted image d30 based on the start lever operation is performed a plurality of times. When the repetitive operation is started, the reciprocating movement of the insertion image d30 for enlargement and reduction is not based on the stop operation. Therefore, the operation specific image d10B is enlarged based on the stop operation and the region of the insertion image d30 is started to be enlarged. There is a possibility that the timing to perform is not simultaneous. That is, after the display of the insertion image d30 is started, the operation specifying image d10B is enlarged while the insertion image d30 is being enlarged, or after the display of the insertion image d30 is started, the insertion image d30 is reduced and moved. There may be a case where the operation specific image d10B is enlarged while the operation is being performed.

  In the second embodiment and modifications A and A1, the display of the inserted image d30 is started when the start lever is operated. However, the trigger for starting the display of the inserted image d30 is not limited to this. For example, the display of the insertion image d30 may be started based on the third stop operation of the previous game. That is, the trigger for starting the display of the insertion image d30 and the trigger for starting the display of the operation specific images d10 and d10B may not be the same.

  Further, in the modified example A, the insertion image d30 is a “border” image, but the insertion image d30 is not limited to this. For example, the insertion image d30 may be an image of a fluid such as “spray”, “smoke”, “flame”, “aura”, and the like. That is, an image that repeats such enlargement and reduction of the fluid may be used as the insertion image d30. Hereinafter, a case where the insertion image d30 is a “splash” image in Modification A will be described (Modification B).

  FIG. 38 is a diagram illustrating a change in the insertion image d30 displayed on the effect image display device 157 in the state transition suggestion effect according to Modification B. FIG. 38 shows a state transition suggestion effect in the final game in the AT state in which the AT background image d2 is displayed.

  FIG. 38 (a-1) shows the display mode of the effect image display device 157 before the start lever operation, and FIGS. 38 (a-2) and (a-3) show the display of the effect image display device 157 after the start lever operation. An embodiment is shown. The slot machine 100 starts displaying the insertion image d30 based on the start lever operation, and enlarges and moves the area of the insertion image d30 from the top to the bottom of the screen. Then, when a predetermined time L2 (about 0.1 second) has elapsed after the start lever operation, the movement of the insertion image d30 is stopped, and the insertion image d30 is displayed in about 1/3 of the display area of the effect image display device 157. (Time t1). Note that the lower limit position of “spray” that is the inserted image d30 at the time point t1 is also referred to as a third position. The state at this time is also referred to as the case where the inserted image d30 is in the third state (the state shown in FIG. 38 (a-2)). Thereafter, the slot machine 100 reduces and moves the region of the insertion image d30 in the third state upward. Then, when a predetermined time L2 (about 0.1 second) has elapsed from time t1, the movement of the insertion image d30 is stopped, and the insertion image d30 is displayed in about 1/6 of the display area of the effect image display device 157 ( Time t2). Note that the lower limit position of “spray” that is the inserted image d30 at the time point t2 is also referred to as a fourth position. The state at this time is also referred to as a case where the inserted image d30 is in the fourth state.

  As described above, in the modified example B, based on the start lever operation, the “spraying” that is the inserted image d30 performs a reciprocating motion such that the wave approaches and pulls up and down. When the insertion image d30 is “splashing”, the boundary portion between the AT background image d2 and the insertion image d30 is not clear, unlike the case where the insertion image d30 is “blind”. It is possible to visually recognize both the AT background image d2 and the insertion image d30 with vagueness.

  38 (a-4) and (a-5) are display modes of the effect image display device 157 after the first stop operation, and FIGS. 38 (a-6) and (a-7) are after the second stop operation. However, the operation of the inserted image d30 after each stop operation is the same as the operation of the inserted image d30 after the start lever operation, and a description thereof will be omitted. That is, based on each stop operation, the “spray” which is the insertion image d30 performs a reciprocating motion such that a wave approaches and pulls up and down.

  FIGS. 38 (a-8), (a-9) and (a-10) show the display mode of the effect image display device 157 after the third stop operation. The slot machine 100 enlarges and moves the region of the insertion image d30 in the fourth state downward based on the third stop operation (state shown in FIG. 38 (a-8)). Then, when the predetermined time L2 has elapsed after the third stop operation, the effect image display device 157 is entirely covered with the insertion image d30 (the state of FIG. 38 (a-9)). When the predetermined time L3 has elapsed from this state, the slot machine 100 deletes the inserted image d30 and displays the normal background image d1 indicating the normal state on the effect image display device 157 (FIG. 38 (a-)). 10)). As a result, the player can grasp that the normal state is reached from the change of the background image.

  Next, in Modification B, a case where the operation condition notification effect and the state transition suggestion effect are executed in the same game will be described. Also in this modification, when the operation condition notification effect and the state transition suggestion effect are executed at the same time, the operations of the effects are the same as those executed independently.

  FIG. 39 shows a case where the small role 3a is internally won in the final game G2 in the AT state, and the reel stop data d1 is selected, and the player performs a correct stop operation (stop operation on the left middle right). The change of the production image (operation specific image d10, d10B, operation correct image d20) of the operation condition notification effect at the time and the insertion image d30 of the state transition suggestion effect is shown.

  39 (a-1) shows the display mode of the effect image display device 157 before the start lever operation, and FIGS. 39 (a-2) and (a-3) show the display of the effect image display device 157 after the start lever operation. An embodiment is shown. After the start lever operation, the slot machine 100 displays the operation specific image d10B corresponding to the first stop operation and the operation specific image d10 corresponding to the remaining stop operation on the AT background image d2 based on the start lever operation. . Further, the slot machine 100 starts displaying the insertion image d30 based on the start lever operation, and moves the insertion image d30 from the top to the bottom of the screen to enter the third state (FIG. 39 (a-2)). After that, the image is reduced and moved upward from the third state to the fourth state (state shown in FIG. 39 (a-3)).

  As described above, in the modified example B, since the insertion image d30 is enlarged and reduced toward d10B, it is possible to give an impression that the peripheral area of the operation specific image 10B is narrowed, and the operation specific image d10B is emphasized. can do.

  The operation of the inserted image d30 after FIG. 39 (a-4) is the same as the operation shown in FIG. 38, and the operations of the operation specifying images d10 and 10B are the same as the operation of the modified example A. Therefore, the description is omitted hereinafter.

  In the modified example B, the “splash” that is the insertion image d30 is generated upward, moved from the upper side to the lower side, and reduced and moved from the lower side to the upper side, as shown in FIG. As described above, the “splash” that is the insertion image d30 is generated on the outer periphery four sides of the effect image display device 157, and is enlarged and moved from each of the outer periphery four sides toward the center, and is reduced and moved from the center toward the outer periphery four sides. Also good. When the insertion image d30 is “splashing”, the boundary portion between the AT background image d2 and the insertion image d30 is not clear. Therefore, at the boundary portion, the player confirms the information displayed in the AT background image d2 in an ambiguous manner. It becomes possible.

  Further, the generation source of “spray” which is the inserted image d30 is not limited to the periphery of the effect image display device 157. For example, as shown in FIG. 40 (b), when the operation specific images d10 and d10B are displayed at the top of the screen, the “spray” that is the insertion image d30 is generated at the center of the screen and The operation specific images d10 and d10B may be enlarged and reduced. That is, the “spray” that is the insertion image d30 may be generated from any position as long as it reciprocates toward the display position of the operation specific images d10 and d10B.

  In FIG. 40B, the operation specifying images d10 and 10B and the insertion image d30 do not overlap, but the two display areas may overlap. In this case, the operation specifying images d10 and 10B are displayed in front of the insertion image d30, and the operation specifying images d10 and 10B are made more conspicuous than the insertion image d30. On the other hand, even if the operation specific image d10B and the insertion image d30 overlap, if the display area of the operation specific image 10B that does not overlap with the insertion image d30 is larger than the display area of the entire operation specific image 10, the insertion image d30 may be displayed in front of the operation specific image 10B. This is because the operation specific image d10B can be made conspicuous also in this case.

  FIG. 40C shows an enlarged view of “spray” which is the insertion image d30. As described above, in the modified example B, the change of “spray” is large on the side close to the operation specific images d10 and d10B (for example, in the vicinity of the operation specific image d10) in the moving direction of the insertion image d30, and “splash” exists. On the side far from the operation specific images d10 and d10B (for example, the peripheral edge of the screen), there is no change of “spray”, and an image showing that “splash” always exists is displayed. Will be. That is, in the modified example B, the change in the display area of the insertion image d30 is large on the side closer to the operation specific images d10 and d10B in the moving direction of the insertion image d30, and on the side far from the operation specific images d10 and d10B. The change in the display area of d30 is small.

  In the modified example B, one reciprocal movement is performed for each game operation, that is, one reciprocation accompanied by enlargement and reduction of the inserted image d30. However, the reciprocating movement with expansion and contraction of the insertion image d30 based on the game operation is not limited to one time. For example, the reciprocating movement of the insertion image d30 for enlargement and reduction may be repeatedly performed a plurality of times based on the gaming operation (Modification B1).

  FIG. 41 is a diagram illustrating a change in the insertion image d30 displayed on the effect image display device 157 in the state transition suggestion effect according to the modification B1. FIG. 41 shows a state transition suggestion effect in the final game in the AT state in which the AT background image d2 is displayed, and the “splash” that is the inserted image d30 occurs on the four outer peripheral sides of the effect image display device 157. Shows the case.

  FIG. 41 shows a case where the movement with the enlargement and reduction of the insertion image d30 is repeated a plurality of times based on the start lever operation. In this modified example B1, the reciprocating movement accompanying the enlargement and reduction of the inserted image d30 is stopped based on the medal insertion operation of the next game, and the inserted image d30 disappears. Note that the reciprocating movement with enlargement and reduction of the insertion image d30 repeats the state of FIG. 41 (a-1) and the state of FIG. 41 (a-2), as well as the state of FIG. 41 (a-2). It may be a thing. In this case, the tip of the “spray” that is the insertion image d30 (in the direction toward the center of the screen) disappears, and thereafter, “splash” occurs again at the disappeared portion. That is, it is good also as a reciprocating movement accompanied by expansion of the display area of insertion image d30, and disappearance of a part of display area of insertion image d30.

  In the modified example B1, when the operation condition notification effect and the state transition suggestion effect are executed in the same game, for example, an operation of repeating a reciprocating movement with enlargement and reduction of the inserted image d30 a plurality of times based on a start lever operation. Since the reciprocating movement accompanying the enlargement and reduction of the insertion image d30 is not based on the stop operation, the timing for enlarging and displaying the operation specific image d10B based on the stop operation and the timing for starting the enlargement of the region of the insertion image d30 May not be simultaneous. That is, after the display of the insertion image d30 is started, the operation specifying image d10B is enlarged while the insertion image d30 is being enlarged, or after the display of the insertion image d30 is started, the insertion image d30 is reduced and moved. There may be a case where the operation specific image d10B is enlarged while the operation is being performed.

  In the modified examples B and B1, the display of the inserted image d30 is started when the start lever is operated. However, the trigger for starting the display of the inserted image d30 is not limited to this. For example, the display of the insertion image d30 may be started based on the third stop operation of the previous game. That is, the trigger for starting the display of the insertion image d30 and the trigger for starting the display of the operation specific images d10 and d10B may not be the same.

-Types of operation specific image d10 In the second embodiment, the type of operation specific image d10 is one, but a plurality of types of operation specific images d10 may be provided. For example, a different operation specific image d10 may be displayed according to the effect state (Modification C).

  In the following modified examples C to G, unlike the state transition diagram of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 6, when RT2 (AT state) is internally elected as a special role, RT3 (normal state) However, the description will be made on the assumption that RT3 (AT state) is entered. In this case, when the number of AT games is exhausted in RT3 (AT state), it becomes RT3 (normal state). RT3 (AT state) is a gaming state that is more advantageous than RT2 (AT state).

  FIG. 42 shows an operation specifying image d10 according to Modification C. Specifically, the production state 1 is RT2 (AT state), and the production state 2 is RT3 (AT state). That is, in the modification C, the operation specific images d10 and d10B that are character images are displayed in the advantageous state 2 in which the special combination is won internally even in the same AT state, and the special combination is not internally won. In the production state 1, the operation specific images d10 and d10B of the numeric image are displayed. Further, the sizes of the operation specific images d10 and d10B in the production state 2 are larger than the sizes of the images of the operation specific images d10 and d10B in the production state 1.

  As a result, the operation condition notification effect in the production state 2 is more conspicuous than the operation condition notification production in the production state 1, so that the player can see more by looking at the type and size of the operation specific image d10. It can be determined whether or not this is an advantageous state. Further, when the operation specific images d10 and d10B are made larger, stop operation mistakes can be reduced.

  In Modification C, the operation condition notification effect in the case where the small combination 3a is internally won in the AT state has been described, but the trigger for executing different types of operation condition notification effects is not limited to this. For example, in a case where a normal regame player and a special regame player (a player's advantageous role) are provided, when the normal regame player is elected internally, an operation specifying image d10 of a normal size numeric image. And d10B are displayed, and when the special re-game player is internally won, the operation specifying images d10 and d10B of a large character image may be displayed. In other words, depending on the result of the winning combination internal lottery process, when an internal winning combination is selected for an advantageous combination (for example, a combination that can be expected to be added to the AT in the AT state), the operation specific image d10 that is larger than usual. And d10B may be displayed. Otherwise, the operation specifying images d10 and 10B having a normal size may be displayed. The player can determine whether or not an advantageous situation is obtained from the image of the operation condition notification effect.

  Further, different types of operation condition notification effects may be executed according to the number of digested games. For example, operation specific images d10 and d10B larger than normal are displayed in the last five games in the AT state, and operation specific images d10 and 10B having normal sizes are displayed in periods other than the last five games in the AT state. You may make it do. Further, different types of operation condition notification effects may be executed according to the flow of effects. For example, in the scene where the game is settled in the confrontation scene of the background image d2, operation specific images d10 and d10B larger than normal are displayed, and in other scenes, the operation specific images d10 and 10B of normal size are displayed. You may do it.

  43 (a) and 43 (b) are operation condition notification effect effect images (operation specific images d10 and d10B) when the operation condition notification effect and the state transition suggestion effect are executed in the same game in Modification C. And it is a figure which shows the insertion image d30 of a state transition suggestion effect. More specifically, FIG. 43A shows a case where the operation condition notification effect and the state transition suggestion effect are executed in the production state 2, and FIG. The case of executing is shown.

  In Modification C, as shown in FIG. 43 (a), in the production state 2, since the operation specific image d10B and the insertion image d30 overlap, the operation specific image d10B is displayed in front of the insertion image d30, The operation specific image d10B is made more conspicuous.

  In addition, you may add rotation operation to the operation specific images d10 and d10B of the modified example C. For example, as shown in FIGS. 43C and 43D, the operation specifying images d10 and d10B may be rotated left and right. 43 (c), when the operation condition notification effect and the state transition suggestion effect are executed in the effect state 2, FIG. 43 (d) executes the operation condition notification effect and the state transition suggestion effect in the effect state 1. Shows the case. In this case, since the swing operation of the operation specific images d10 and d10B in the production state 2 is more swayed than the rotation operation of the operation specific images d10 and d10B in the production state 1, the player can select the operation specific images d10 and d10B. It is possible to grasp whether or not it is a more advantageous state from the size of the sway and the size of the shaking.

  In addition, when the swing of the operation specific images d10 and d10B is large, the AT background image d2 existing behind it becomes easier to see for the player than when the swing is small, and thus the AT background image d2 can be easily recognized. There is a case.

-Types and operations of inserted image d30 In the second embodiment, there is only one type of operation of the "blade" image that is the inserted image d30. However, in addition to this, a plurality of types of operations of the inserted image d30 are provided. May be. For example, you may make it display the operation | movement of the different insertion image d30 according to an effect state (modification D).

  FIG. 44 is a diagram illustrating a difference in operation of the inserted image d30 when the operation condition notification effect and the state transition suggestion effect are executed in the same game in the modification D.

  In Modification D, as shown in FIG. 44, the amount of movement of the insertion image d30 based on the game operation is increased in the production state 2 that is more advantageous than the production state 1. As a result, the player can determine whether or not it is an advantageous state by looking at the movement amount of the insertion image d30.

  In Modification D, the movement amount is varied as the operation of the insertion image d30. However, the movement speed may be changed together with the movement amount. For example, in the production state 2 that is more advantageous than the production state 1, the movement amount and the movement speed of the insertion image d30 based on the game operation may be increased.

  In the modified example D, as in the modified example C, not only the production state but also (1) the result of the winning combination internal lottery process, (2) the number of digested games, and (3) the insertion according to the flow of production. The movement amount of the image d30 may be changed.

  Moreover, you may combine the modification C and the modification D (modification E). FIG. 45 shows an image displayed on the effect image display device 157 in the modification E when the operation condition notification effect and the state transition suggestion effect are executed in the same game. Specifically, FIG. 45A shows the inserted image d30 and the operation specific images d10 and d10B in the production state 2, and FIG. 45B shows the insertion image d30 and the operation specific images d10 and d10B in the production state 1. Is shown.

  Thus, in the production state 2, as compared with the production state 1, the movement specific amount d10 and d10B may be displayed larger while the movement amount of the insertion image d30 is increased. The player can determine whether or not it is an advantageous state by looking at the amount of movement of the insertion image d30 and the size of the operation specifying images d10 and d10B.

  In the second embodiment, the color or pattern of the insertion image d30 is one type, but an insertion image d30 having a different color or pattern may be displayed according to the effect state (Modification F).

  FIG. 46 is a diagram illustrating a difference in color of the inserted image d30 when the operation condition notification effect and the state transition suggestion effect are executed in the same game in the modification example F. Here, FIG. 46A shows the insertion image d30 and the operation specifying images d10 and d10B in the production state 2, and the insertion image d30 is red. On the other hand, FIG. 46B shows the inserted image d30 and the operation specifying images d10 and d10B in the production state 1, and the inserted image d30 is brown.

  Thus, in the production state 2, the color of the insertion image d30 may be a more conspicuous color compared to the production state 1. The player can determine whether or not it is an advantageous state by looking at the color or pattern of the inserted image d30.

  In the modified example F, as in the modified example C, not only the production state but also (1) the result of the winning combination internal lottery process, (2) the number of games to be played, and (3) the insertion according to the flow of production. The color or pattern of the image d30 may be changed.

  Moreover, you may combine the modification F and the modification C (modification G). FIG. 47 shows an image displayed on the effect image display device 157 in the modification G when the operation condition notification effect and the state transition suggestion effect are executed in the same game. Specifically, FIG. 47A shows the inserted image d30 and the operation specific images d10 and d10B in the production state 2, and FIG. 47B shows the insertion image d30 and the operation specific images d10 and d10B in the production state 1. Is shown.

  As described above, in the production state 2, as compared with the production state 1, the color of the insertion image d30 may be made more conspicuous and the operation specific images d10 and d10B may be displayed larger. The player can determine whether or not it is an advantageous state by looking at the color of the insertion image d30 and the size of the operation specifying images d10 and d10B.

  In the effect state 2, the color of the insertion image d30 may be changed for each game operation. For example, the color may be changed to white based on the start lever operation, yellow based on the first stop operation, green based on the second stop operation, and red based on the third stop operation.

  FIG. 48A shows an example of the relationship between the color of the inserted image d30 and the expectation level. As described above, a plurality of colors of inserted images d30 having different degrees of expectation may be provided. FIG. 48B is a table showing the probability that each operation specifying image d10 has the color of the insertion image d30 shown in FIG. 48A and when the operation specifying image d10 of numbers or characters is displayed. It is. For example, in the case of displaying a low-to-medium brown insertion image d30 with a low expectation level, the probability of selecting the numeric operation specific image d10 is 90%, and the probability of selecting the character operation specific image d10 is 10%. On the other hand, when the golden insertion image d30 with high expectation is displayed, the probability that the numeric operation specifying image d10 is selected is 10%, and the probability that the character operation specifying image d10 is selected is 90%. It has become. That is, when the insertion image d30 of a color with high expectation is displayed, the probability that the operation specifying image d10 of the character indicating an advantageous state is displayed may be increased.

[Third Embodiment]
In the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the insertion image d30 is displayed on one background image, the area of the one background image is gradually shielded and reduced, and the display area is enlarged. Finally, after the entire screen was made into the insertion image d30, it was switched to another background image for display. However, in the third embodiment, one background image is gradually made difficult to visually recognize by gradually mixing the inserted image with one background image (an image in which one background image and the inserted image are mixed is displayed on the screen). Finally, the ratio of one background image is set to 0%, the ratio of the inserted image d30 is set to 100%, and the entire screen is changed to the inserted image d30, and then switched to another background image for display. . As described above, the method of gradually obscuring one background image and gradually clarifying the inserted image d30 also reduces the display area (display area) of the one background image and gradually inserts the inserted image d30. This can be considered as a method of gradually expanding the display area (display area). There are cases where both the background image of the entire screen and the inserted image d30 of the entire screen can be recognized while switching from the background image to the inserted image d30.

  In the following description, the configuration, function, and processing different from those of the first embodiment will be mainly described, and the other components, function, and processing will be denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 49 shows a case where the small combination 3a is internally won in the final game G2 in the AT state of the present embodiment (third embodiment), and the reel stop data d1 is selected. The change of the effect condition notification effect effect image (operation specific image d10, operation correct image d20) and the state transition suggestion effect insert image d30 when the left middle right stop operation is performed is shown. Here, the insertion image d30 is specifically an image like a sandstorm shown in FIG. 49 (a-6).

  In the present embodiment, the inserted image d30 is mixed every game operation (start lever operation, first stop operation, second stop operation, third stop operation). As the mixing method, a method of increasing the insertion image d30 at a constant rate every time the operation is performed is preferable. For example, the mixing ratio of the insertion image d30 is increased from 0% to 25% based on the start lever operation (AT The mixing ratio of the background image d2 is reduced from 100% to 75%), and the mixing ratio of the insertion image d30 is increased from 25% to 50% based on the first stop operation (the mixing ratio of the AT background image d2 is increased from 75% to 50%). The mixing ratio of the insertion image d30 is increased from 50% to 75% based on the second stop operation (the mixing ratio of the AT background image d2 is decreased from 50% to 25%), and the insertion image is based on the third stop operation. There is a method of increasing the mixing ratio of d30 from 75% to 100% (reducing the mixing ratio of the AT background image d2 from 25% to 0%).

  In the present embodiment, the mixed image d2 & d30 obtained by mixing the AT background image d2 and the insertion image d30 is displayed on the entire screen, but only the effect image (operation specific image d10, operation correct image d20) region of the operation condition notification effect is displayed. Is an exception. That is, as shown in FIG. 49, the operation specifying image d10 and the operation correct answer image d20 are clearly displayed, so that the player can accurately grasp the operation details to be notified and whether or not the operation performed is correct. Can do.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the content of the background image d2 becomes gradually difficult to visually recognize by gradually increasing the mixing ratio of the insertion image d30, so that the operation specifying image d10 and the operation correct image d20 are displayed. You can emphasize it gradually and make it stand out.

  Of course, also in this embodiment, the operation correct image d20 is displayed larger than the operation specific image d10 and the operation correct image d20 is displayed in front of the operation specific image d10, so that the operation correct image d20 is more emphasized and conspicuous. Can be made.

<Other variations>
As shown in FIG. 50, the mixed image d2 & d30 may not be displayed in the entire rectangular area A20 including the area of the operation specifying image d10 and the operation correct image d20 (the third stop operation after the start lever operation). Until the display of the operation correct answer image d20 based on is completed). Also in this case, the operation specifying image d10 and the operation correct answer image d20 can be gradually emphasized and made conspicuous. Here, FIG. 50 (a) shows a case where the small combination 3a is internally won in the final game G2 in the AT state, and the reel stop data d1 is selected. This shows the change in the effect image (operation specific image d10, operation correct image d20) of the operation condition notification effect and the inserted image d30 of the state transition suggestion effect when the stop operation is performed. FIG. 50B is a diagram showing in detail the positional relationship between the region of the operation specifying image d10 and the operation correct answer image d20 and the rectangular region A20.

  In FIG. 50, the fact that the third stop operation is the correct operation is determined by the fact that both the first stop operation and the second stop operation are correct operations. That is, it can be determined that the operation correct image d20 after the first stop operation and the operation correct image d20 after the second stop operation are images suggesting the operation correct answer of the third stop operation. Therefore, in the entire rectangular area A20 including the area of the operation specific image d10 and the operation correct image d20, the mixed image d2 & d30 is not displayed after the third stop operation (without waiting for the display of the operation correct image d20 to end). It may be.

  Moreover, you may incorporate the structure of 2nd Embodiment in this embodiment (3rd Embodiment). That is, instead of displaying the operation correct image d20 larger than the operation specific image d10, the operation specific image d10 may be displayed larger than the operation correct image d20. The operation specific image d10 can be emphasized and made conspicuous.

[Fourth Embodiment]
In the internal lottery in which the role of the slot machine is determined internally, lottery data corresponding to a set value (specifically, set values 1 to 6) is used. For example, there is a game machine in which a difference in winning probability of a small role is provided according to a set value (Japanese Patent No. 6063591).

  When there is a difference in the winning combination probability of the small role according to the set value, there is a pleasure of guessing the set value while advancing the game. However, if there is a difference in the winning probability of the small role depending on the set value, it is desirable that the difference be so small that the set value can be predicted when the player plays a game for a long time. In other words, it is not preferable that the set value is predicted in a short-time game because the player cannot expect a long-time game.

  The gaming machine of the present embodiment is a gaming machine that makes it difficult to guess the setting value in a short time game even if a difference in the winning probability of the small role is provided according to the setting value.

<Overall configuration>
FIG. 51 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 1100 according to the third embodiment of the present invention. A slot machine 1100 shown in FIG. 51 corresponds to an example of a gaming machine of the present invention, and includes a main body 1101 and a front door 1102 that is attached to the front surface of the main body 1101 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 1101. . Inside the center of the main body 1101 (not shown), three reels (left reel 1110, middle reel 1111 and right reel 1112) having a plurality of types of symbols arranged on the outer peripheral surface are stored and rotated inside the slot machine 1100. It is configured to be able to. These reels 1110 to 1112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

  In the present embodiment, an appropriate number of symbols are printed on the belt-like member at equal intervals, and the reels 1110 to 1112 are configured by affixing the belt-like member to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame material. When viewed from the player, the symbols on the reels 1110 to 1112 are displayed approximately three in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 1113 so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. Then, by rotating the reels 1110 to 1112, the combination of symbols that can be seen by the player varies. That is, each reel 1110 to 1112 functions as a display device that displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols in a variable manner. In addition to the reel, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can also be used as such a display device. In this embodiment, three reels are provided in the center of the slot machine 1100. However, the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

  Backlights (not shown) for illuminating individual symbols displayed on the symbol display window 1113 are arranged on the rear surfaces of the reels 1110 to 1112. It is desirable that the backlight is shielded for each symbol so that the individual symbols can be illuminated evenly. In the slot machine 1100, an optical sensor (index sensor; not shown) including a light projecting unit and a light receiving unit is provided in the vicinity of each of the reels 1110 to 1112. The light projecting unit of this optical sensor. A light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the light receiving portion and the light receiving portion. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the position of the symbol on the reel in the rotation direction is determined, and the reels 1110 to 1112 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the winning line.

  The winning line display lamp 1120 is a lamp indicating a winning line 1114 that is valid. An effective winning line (hereinafter also referred to as an effective line) is determined in advance by the number of medals bet as a game medium.

  In the present embodiment, five winning lines are set: a middle horizontal winning line, an upper horizontal winning line, a lower horizontal winning line, a right rising winning line, and a right falling winning line.

  The slot machine 1100 of this embodiment is a gaming table dedicated to three bets, and when the number of inserted medals (the number of bets) reaches a specified number (three), the above five winning lines become effective. When the winning line is activated, the game can be started by operating the start lever 1135. The number of winning lines is not limited to 5 lines. Further, the game table may not be dedicated to betting three pieces, and a number of winning lines corresponding to the number of bets may be set as effective winning lines.

  For example, the notification lamp 1123 indicates to the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a special combination (bonus)) has been won internally or that a bonus game is being performed in an internal lottery to be described later. It is a lamp to inform. The game medal insertable lamp 1124 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert a game medal. The replay lamp 1122 informs the player that the current game can be replayed (the medal insertion is unnecessary) when winning a replay that is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. It is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 1128 is an effect lamp.

  The bet buttons 1130 to 1132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) stored electronically in the slot machine 1100. In this embodiment, every time the bet button 1130 is pressed, a maximum of three cards are inserted, two are inserted when the bet button 1131 is pressed, and three are inserted when the bet button 1132 is pressed. It has become so. Hereinafter, the bet button 1132 is also referred to as a MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamp 1129 lights up a number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when a specified number of medals are inserted, a game start is informed that a game start operation is possible. The lamp 1121 is turned on.

  The medal slot 1141 is an slot for a player to insert a medal when starting a game. In other words, the insertion of medals can be made electronically with the bet buttons 1130 to 1132, or an actual medal can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 1141. is there.

  The stored number display 1125 is a display for displaying the number of medals stored electronically in the slot machine 1100. The game information display 1126 is a display for displaying various types of internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) as numerical values. The payout number display 1127 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a winning combination. In the present embodiment, the stored number display unit 1125, the game information display unit 1126, and the payout number display unit 1127 are configured by a 7 segment (SEG) display. Note that the payout number display unit 1127 of the present embodiment also functions as an operation navigation execution device that notifies information related to the stop operation (for example, the operation order and operation timing of the stop buttons 1137 to 1139).

  The start lever 1135 is a lever type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 1110 to 1112. That is, when a desired medal number is inserted into the medal insertion slot 1141 or the bet buttons 1130 to 1132 are operated and the start lever 1135 is operated, the reels 1110 to 1112 start to rotate. The operation on the start lever 1135 is referred to as a game start operation.

  The stop button unit 1136 is provided with stop buttons 1137 to 1139. The stop buttons 1137 to 1139 are button-type push switches for individually stopping the reels 1110 to 1112 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 1135, and are provided in association with the reels 1110 to 1112. . More specifically, the left reel 1110 can be stopped by operating the left stop button 1137, the middle reel 1111 can be stopped by operating the middle stop button 1138, and the right stop button 1139 can be The right reel 1112 can be stopped by operating.

  Hereinafter, the operation on the stop buttons 1137 to 1139 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the last stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. The reel to be operated may be referred to as a first stop reel, the reel to be subjected to a second stop operation may be referred to as a second stop reel, and the reel to be subjected to a third stop operation may be referred to as a third stop reel. Furthermore, the order of stopping the stop buttons 1137 to 1139 for stopping all the reels 1110 to 1112 in rotation is referred to as an operation order or a pressing order. The operation order for the stop operation with the first stop reel as the left reel 1110 is referred to as “forward press operation order” or simply “forward press”, and the operation order for the stop operation with the first stop reel as the right reel 1112 is “ This is called “reverse pressing operation sequence” or simply “reverse pressing”. Note that a light emitter may be provided in each of the stop buttons 1137 to 1139, and when the stop buttons 1137 to 1139 can be operated, the light emitter can be turned on to notify the player.

  The navigation occurrence state notification lamp 1190 is a lamp that is turned on when the game state of the main control unit 1300 is in either the navigation occurrence state 1 or 2 described below (hereinafter referred to as “when the navigation state is present”). The player can grasp that the navigation is occurring from the lighting state of the navigation occurrence state notification lamp 1190.

  The medal return button 1133 is a button for pressing and removing a medal when the inserted medal is clogged. The payment button 1134 is a button for adjusting the medals stored electronically in the slot machine 1100 and the bet medals and discharging them from the medal payout exit 1155. Door key hole 1140 is a hole into which a key for unlocking front door 1102 of slot machine 1100 is inserted. The medal payout exit 1155 is a payout exit for paying out medals.

  Below the stop button unit 1136, a title panel 1162 for displaying a model name and pasting various types of certificate stamps is provided. At the bottom of the title panel 1162, a medal payout opening 1155 and a medal tray 1161 are provided.

  The sound hole 1181 is a hole for outputting the sound of a speaker provided inside the slot machine 1100 to the outside. Side lamps 1144 provided at the left and right portions of the front door 1102 are decorative lamps for exciting games. An effect device 1160 is disposed above the front door 1102, and a sound hole 1143 is provided above the effect device 1160. The rendering device 1160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 1163 including two right shutters 1163a and 1163b that can be opened and closed in a horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 1157 (not shown) disposed on the back side of the shutter 1163. When the right shutter 1163a and the left shutter 1163b are opened outward in the horizontal direction in front of the liquid crystal display device 1157, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1157 (not shown) is displayed in front of the slot machine 1100 (game). The structure appears on the person side).

  The liquid crystal display device (effect image display device) 1157 of the present embodiment also functions as an operation navigation execution device that notifies information related to the stop operation (for example, the operation order and operation timing of the stop buttons 1137 to 1139).

  In addition, even if it is not a liquid crystal display device, it should just be comprised so that various effect images and various game information can be displayed, for example, a multi-segment display (7-segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, a plasma display , A reel (drum), or a display device including a projector and a screen. Further, the display screen has a rectangular shape and is configured so that the player can visually recognize the entire display screen. In the case of this embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but may be square. In addition, a decorative object (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen, and a part of the peripheral edge of the display screen may be hidden by the decorative object, so that the display screen looks irregular. In the present embodiment, the display screen is a flat surface, but may be a curved surface.

<Inside housing>
FIG. 52 is a front view showing the slot machine 1100 with the front door 1102 opened. The main body 1101 is a box that is surrounded by an upper surface plate 1261, a left side plate 1260, a right side plate 1260, a lower surface plate 1264, and a back plate 1242 and opens to the front. Inside the main body 1101, a main control board storage case 1210 in which the main control board is stored is disposed at a position that does not overlap with the ventilation hole 1249 provided on the upper portion of the back plate 1242. Three reels 1110 to 1112 are arranged below. A first sub control board storage housing a first sub control board constituting a first sub control unit inside the main control board storage case 1210 and the side plates 1260 on the left side of the reels 1110 to 1112. A case 1220 is provided. The right side plate 1260 is attached with an external concentration terminal plate 1248 that is connected to the main control board and outputs information of the slot machine 1100 to an external device.

  The lower surface plate 1264 is provided with a medal payout device 1180 (device for paying out medals accumulated in the bucket), and has a power supply board above the medal payout device 1180, that is, below the reels 1110 to 1112. A power supply device 1252 is provided, and a power switch 1244 is provided on the front surface of the power supply device 1252. The power switch 1244 can be operated by opening the front door 1102, and it is difficult or impossible to operate in the closed state.

  The power supply device 1252 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the slot machine 1100 into a direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and converts each of the main control unit 1300, the first sub control unit 1400, the second sub control unit 1500, etc. Supply to the control unit and each device. Furthermore, a power storage circuit (for example, a capacitor) for supplying power to a predetermined part (for example, the RAM 1308 of the main control unit 1300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the power supply from the outside is cut off is provided. Yes.

  A medal auxiliary storage 1240 is arranged on the right side of the medal payout device 1180, and an overflow terminal is arranged behind this (not shown). The power supply device 1252 is provided with a power cord connecting portion for connecting a power cord 1265, and the power cord 1265 connected thereto extends to the outside through a power cord hole 1262 provided in the back plate 1242 of the main body 1101. Yes.

  The front door 1102 is hinged to the left side plate 1260 of the main body 1101 via a hinge device 1276, and on the upper part of the liquid crystal display device 1157, the effect device 1160 and an effect control board (illustrated) for controlling the effect device 1160 are shown. The upper speaker 1272 is provided. Below the liquid crystal display device 1157, there are provided a medal selector 1170 for selecting inserted medals, a passage 1266 through which medals pass when the medal selector 1170 drops illegal medals and the like onto the medal tray 1161. Yes. Further, a bass speaker 1277 is provided at a position corresponding to the sound hole 1180.

<Circuit configuration of control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the slot machine 1100 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

  The control unit of the slot machine 1100 can be broadly divided into main effects according to a main control unit 1300 that controls the progress of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 1300. The first sub-control unit 1400 that performs the above control, and the second sub-control unit 1500 that controls various devices based on the command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 1400.

<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 1300 of the slot machine 1100 will be described. The main control unit 1300 includes a basic circuit 1302 that controls the entire main control unit 1300. The basic circuit 1302 includes a CPU 1304, control program data, lottery data used during an internal lottery for a winning combination, and reel stop. ROM 1306 for storing position, RAM 1308 for temporarily storing data, I / O 1310 for controlling input / output of various devices, counter timer 1312 for measuring time, frequency, etc. A WDT (watchdog timer) 1314 is mounted. Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 1306 and the RAM 1308, and this is the same for the first sub-control unit 1400 and the second sub-control unit 1500 described later. The CPU 1304 of the basic circuit 1302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 1315b as a system clock. Further, when the power is turned on, the CPU 1304 transmits the frequency division data stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 1306 to the counter timer 1312. The counter timer 1312 sets the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data. An interrupt request is transmitted to the CPU 1304 at every interrupt time. In response to this interrupt request, the CPU 1304 executes monitoring of each sensor and transmission of drive pulses. For example, when the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 1315b is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the data for frequency division of the ROM 1306 is set to 47, the interrupt reference time is 256 × 47 ÷ 8 MHz. = 1.504 ms.

  The main control unit 1300 is activated when a power is turned on, and a random value generation circuit 1316 used as a hardware random number counter that changes a numerical value in a range of 0 to 65535 based on a clock signal input from the crystal oscillator 1315a. A start signal output circuit 1338 that outputs a signal (reset signal) is provided, and the CPU 1304 starts game control when a start signal is input from the start signal output circuit 1338 (main control unit main processing described later) To start).

  The main control unit 1300 includes a sensor circuit 1320, and the CPU 1304 inputs various sensors 1318 (the bet button 1130 sensor, the bet button 1131 sensor, the bet button 1132 sensor, and the medal insertion slot 1141 every interruption time). Medal medal acceptance sensor, start lever 1135 sensor, stop button 1137 sensor, stop button 1138 sensor, stop button 1139 sensor, checkout button 1134 sensor, medal payout sensor for medals paid out from medal payout device 1180, index sensor for reel 1110, The status of the index sensor of the reel 1111, the index sensor of the reel 1112, etc.) is monitored.

  When the sensor circuit 1320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, a signal indicating this detection is output to the random value generation circuit 1316. Receiving this signal, the random value generation circuit 1316 latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register that stores the random value used for the lottery.

  Two medal acceptance sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal insertion slot 1141 and detect whether or not a medal has passed. Two start lever 1135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 1135 and detect a start operation by the player. The stop button 1137 sensor, the stop button 1138 sensor, and the stop button 1139 sensor are installed in each of the stop buttons 1137 to 1139, and detect the operation of the stop button by the player.

  The bet button 1130 sensor, the bet button 1131 sensor, and the bet button 1132 sensor are installed on the medal insertion buttons 1130 to 1132, respectively, and the medal stored electronically in the RAM 1308 is inserted as an inserted medal into the game. Detecting the case input operation. The settlement button 1134 sensor is provided on the settlement button 1134. When the settlement button 1134 is pressed once, medals stored electronically are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting a medal paid out by the medal payout device 1180. Each of the above sensors may be a non-contact type sensor or a contact type sensor.

  The index sensor of the reel 1110, the index sensor of the reel 1111, and the index sensor of the reel 1112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounting bases of the reels 1110 to 1112, and each time the light shielding piece provided on the reel frame passes through L. Become a level. When detecting this signal, the CPU 1304 determines that the reel has made one rotation, and resets the reel rotation position information to zero.

  The main control unit 1300 is provided in a drive circuit 1322 for driving a stepping motor provided on the reels 1110 to 1112, a drive circuit 1324 for driving a solenoid provided in a medal selector 1170 for selecting inserted medals, and a medal payout device 1180. Drive circuit 1326 for driving the motor, and various lamps 1336 (winning line display lamp 1120, notification lamp 1123, game medal insertion possible lamp 1124, replay game lamp 1122, game medal insertion lamp 1129, game start lamp 1121, and stored number indicator 1125, a game information display 1126, a payout number display 127, and a navigation generation state notification lamp 1190) are provided.

  In addition, an information output circuit 1334 is connected to the basic circuit 1302, and the main control unit 1300 is slotted into an information input circuit 1652 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 1334. The game information (for example, game state) of the machine 1100 is output. The main control unit 1300 also includes a voltage monitoring circuit 1330 that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied to the main control unit 1300, and the voltage monitoring circuit 1330 has a voltage value of the power source of a predetermined value (this embodiment). In the example, when it is less than 9v), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 1302.

  The main control unit 1300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 1400 and enables communication with the first sub control unit 1400. The information communication between the main control unit 1300 and the first sub control unit 1400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 1300 can transmit a signal such as a command to the first sub control unit 1400. A signal such as a command cannot be transmitted from the unit 1400 to the main control unit 1300.

<Sub control unit>
Next, the first sub control unit 1400 of the slot machine 1100 will be described. The first sub control unit 1400 includes a basic circuit 1402 that receives a control command transmitted from the main control unit 1300 via an input interface and controls the entire first sub control unit 1400 based on the control command. Yes. The basic circuit 1402 includes a CPU 1404, a RAM 1408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 1410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 1412 for measuring time and frequency. doing. The CPU 1404 of the basic circuit 1402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 1414 as a system clock. The first sub-control unit 1400 stores a ROM 1406 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 1400, a backlight lighting pattern, data for controlling various displays, and the like are stored. Provided.

  The CPU 1404 transmits the frequency dividing data stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 1406 to the counter timer 1412 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 1412 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 1404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 1404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the interrupt request timing.

  The first sub-control unit 1400 is provided with a sound source IC 1418, and speakers 1272 and 1277 are connected to the sound source IC 1418 via an output interface. The sound source IC 1418 controls sound output from the amplifiers and speakers 1272 and 1277 in accordance with a command from the CPU 1404. The sound source IC 1418 is connected to an S-ROM (sound ROM) in which sound data is stored. The sound data acquired from the ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the speakers 1272 and 1277.

  The first sub-control unit 1400 is also provided with a drive circuit 1422. The drive circuit 1422 has various lamps 1420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 1144, title panel 162 lamp, etc.) via an input / output interface. Is connected.

  The first sub control unit 1400 is provided with a drive circuit 1424 for driving the shutter 1163, and the shutter 1163 is connected to the drive circuit 1424 via an output interface. The drive circuit 1424 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided in the shutter 1163 in response to a command from the CPU 1404.

  The first sub-control unit 1400 is provided with a sensor circuit 1426, and a shutter sensor 1428 is connected to the sensor circuit 1426 via an input interface. The CPU 1404 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 1428 every interruption time.

  The CPU 1404 transmits and receives signals to the second sub control unit 1500 via the output interface. The second sub control unit 1500 of the slot machine 1100 controls the liquid crystal display device 1157 and the like.

  Next, the second sub control unit 1500 of the slot machine 1100 will be described. The second sub control unit 1500 receives a control command transmitted from the first sub control unit 1400 via the input interface, and includes a basic circuit 1502 that controls the entire second sub control unit 1500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 1502 includes a CPU 1504, a RAM 1508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 1510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter for measuring time, frequency, and the like. A timer 1512 is mounted. The CPU 1504 of the basic circuit 1502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 1514 as a system clock. The second sub control unit 1500 is provided with a ROM 1506 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub control unit 1500, data for image display, and the like are stored.

  The CPU 1504 transmits the frequency dividing data stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 1506 to the counter timer 1512 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 1512 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 1504 at each interrupt time. The CPU 1504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the interrupt request timing.

  The second sub control unit 1500 is provided with a VDP 1516 (video display processor), and a ROM 1506 and a VRAM 1518 are connected to the VDP 1516 via a bus. The VDP 1516 reads out image data and the like stored in the ROM 1506 based on a signal from the CPU 1504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 1516, and displays the image on the effect image display device 1157.

<Pattern arrangement>
Next, the symbol arrangement applied to each of the reels 1110 to 1112 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a diagram in which the arrangement of symbols applied to each reel (left reel 1110, middle reel 1111, right reel 1112) is developed in a plane.

  Each reel 1110 to 1112 has a predetermined number of symbols (21 frames numbered 0 to 20 in this embodiment) arranged in a plurality of types (10 types in this embodiment) shown on the right side of FIG. . Numbers 0 to 20 shown at the left end of the figure are numbers indicating the positions (symbol positions) of symbols on the reels 1110 to 1112. For example, a “bell design” is placed on the number 1 frame of the left reel 1110, a “replay design” is placed on the number 0 frame of the middle reel 1111, and a “watermelon design” is placed on the number 0 frame of the right reel 1112. ing.

<Type of winning prize>
Next, the types of winning combinations of the slot machine 1100 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure shows the types of winning combinations (including actuating combinations), symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and the operation or payout of each winning combination.

  The winning combination of the slot machine 1100 includes a special combination (special combination 1, special combination 2) and a general combination (replay combination 1 to replay combination 3, small combination 1 to small combination 4). The types of winning combinations are not limited to these combinations and can be arbitrarily adopted.

  Among the winning combinations in this embodiment, the special combination 1 and the special combination 2 are combinations that shift to a special gaming state (also referred to as RT3, which will be described later in detail) in which a predetermined profit is given to the player. In addition, the re-playing role 1 to the re-playing role 3 are roles that enable re-playing without newly inserting medals. These winning combinations may be referred to as “acting combinations”. In addition, “winning” in the present embodiment includes a case where a symbol combination of an operating combination that does not accompany a medal payout (ie, does not accompany a medal payout) is displayed on the active line. A special combination 2 and a winning combination for re-playing role 1 to re-playing role 3 are included.

  Special combinations 1 and 2 (hereinafter, sometimes collectively referred to as “special combination”) are combinations (operating combinations) that shift to the special gaming state (RT3) by winning. However, medals will not be paid out for winning this role. In the corresponding symbol combination, the special role 1 is “Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1 (BB1)” or “Seven 2-Seven 2-Seven 2 (BB2)”, and the special role 2 is “BAR-BAR-BAR”. (RB) ".

  When the special combination is won internally, a special combination internal winning flag corresponding to the internal winning combination is set to ON (stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 1308 of the main control unit 1300). When this flag is set to ON, the main control unit 1300 shifts the gaming state to the special combination internal winning state (also referred to as RT2, which will be described in detail later). This flag is kept on until winning the internal winning combination, and it becomes easy to win the internal winning combination in subsequent games. In other words, even if the special winning combination is not won in the game in which the special winning combination 1 or 2 is won internally, the special winning combination will be held in the next game or later, and the symbol combination corresponding to the special winning combination (for example, the special winning combination) In the case of winning an internal winning 1, the combination of “Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1 (BB1)” or “Seven 2-Seven 2-Seven 2 (BB2)”) will be in a state where it is easy to win.

  The main control unit 1300 shifts the gaming state to the special gaming state (RT3) based on the display of the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination won internally. Further, in this special game state, when a predetermined number of payouts are made, the state is changed to a normal state (also referred to as RT1-1, which will be described in detail later).

  Re-players 1 to 3 (hereinafter sometimes collectively referred to as “re-players”) can receive a winning combination (actuation) that allows a player to play a game without inserting a medal (game medium) in the next game. The medal is not paid out. The corresponding symbol combinations are “replay-replay-replay” for re-playing role 1 (also referred to as “normal replay”) and “replay-replay-bell” for re-playing role 2 (also referred to as “promotional replay 1”). The re-playing role 3 (also referred to as “promotion replay 2”) is “bell-replay-replay”.

  Based on the display of the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game player 2 in the normal state (RT1-1), the main control unit 1300 displays the game state in the navigation generation state 1 (also referred to as RT1-2, which will be described in detail later). To migrate. Further, based on the display of the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game player 3 in the navigation generation state 1 (RT1-2), the gaming state is shifted to the navigation generation state 2 (also referred to as RT1-3, which will be described later in detail). Let

  “Positions 1 to 4” (hereinafter sometimes collectively referred to as “small roles”) is a winning combination in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out by winning, and the corresponding symbol combination is small size 1 (“watermelon”). Say "Watermelon-Watermelon-Watermelon", Small part 2 (also called "Cherry") is "ANY-Cherry-ANY", Small part 3 (also called "Push order bell") "Bell-Bell-Bell" , Small role 4 (also referred to as “common bell”) is “bell-bell-bell”. The corresponding payout number is as shown in FIG. In the case of “ANY-cherry-ANY”, the symbol of the middle reel 1111 may be “cherry”, and the symbol of the left reel 1110 and the right reel 1112 may be any symbol.

  In the present embodiment, the small combination 1 (watermelon) and the small combination 2 (cherry) win a prize when the winning combination internal lottery process is performed and the operation timing of the stop operation is suitable. Further, the small combination 3 (push order bell) wins when the winning combination internal lottery processing is performed and the combination is stopped in the correct stop operation sequence. On the other hand, the small combination 4 (common bell) always wins regardless of the contents of the stop operation (operation order, operation timing) when the winning combination is won internally in the winning combination internal lottery process. It is also called a pull-in 1 role, an unquestionable push order.

  In this embodiment, the small combination 3 (push order bell) and the small combination 4 (common bell) have the same symbol combination and the same number of medals, so that “bell-bell- When the symbol combination “Bell” is displayed, the player cannot determine whether the player has won the small role 3 (push order bell) or the small role 4 (common bell). In the following, when either of the small role 3 (push order bell) or the small role 4 (common bell) is won internally and the symbol combination “Bell-Bell-Bell” is displayed on the active line, "

  If the active line is a single winning line, both the symbol combination corresponding to the small role 3 and the symbol combination corresponding to the small role 4 will stop on the same effective line. When the line is a plurality of winning lines (for example, five winning lines), both of the above are stopped on at least one winning line of the plurality of winning lines. This is because if both players always stop on different winning lines, it is possible to identify whether the player has won the small role 3 (push order bell) or the small role 4 (common bell) because of the difference in the stop position.

  The small role 3 (push order bell) is set so that the profit degree differs depending on the operation order from the first stop operation to the third stop operation on the stop buttons 1137 to 1139 of the player. Specifically, when a small winning combination 3 (push order bell) is won internally, a correct operation lottery is executed. (1) The first stop reel is the left reel 1110, the second stop reel is the middle reel 1111, and the third stop reel. (2) The first stop reel is the left reel 1110, the second stop reel is the right reel 1112, and the third stop reel is the center reel 1111. (3) Stop operation in which the first stop reel is the middle reel 1111, the second stop reel is the left reel 1110, and the third stop reel is the right reel 1112. (Hereinafter abbreviated as “middle left and right”), (4) stop operation (hereinafter referred to as “middle reel” with the first stop reel as the middle reel 1111, the second stop reel as the right reel 1112, and the third stop reel as the left reel 1110. Right to left " (5) Stop operation with the first stop reel as the right reel 1112, the second stop reel as the left reel 1110, and the third stop reel as the middle reel 1111 (hereinafter abbreviated as “right and left middle”), ( 6) From six options of stop operation (hereinafter abbreviated as “right middle left”) in which the first stop reel is the right reel 1112, the second stop reel is the middle reel 1111, and the third stop reel is the left reel 1110. Since any one of them is determined as a correct answer stop operation, when this correct answer stop operation is performed, a small role 3 (push order bell) is won and eight medals are paid out. When a stop operation other than the above is performed, the small role 3 (push order bell) is not won and eight medals are not paid out.

  On the other hand, the small role 4 (common bell) is not set so that the profitability differs depending on the operation order from the first stop operation to the third stop operation on the stop buttons 1137 to 1139 of the player. When winning a small combination 4 (common bell), regardless of the operation sequence of the above six options, the winning combination is always awarded to the small combination 4 (common bell) and 8 medals are paid out. .

  Here, an outline of the internal winning probability of the winning combination will be outlined.

  The internal winning probability of the winning combination in each gaming state described below is a random number obtained from the lottery data prepared in the ROM 1306 and corresponding to the range of the lottery data associated with each winning combination. It is obtained by a value divided by numerical data in a numerical range (for example, 65535). The lottery data is divided into several numerical ranges in advance, and each combination and lose is associated with each numerical range. In a winning combination internal lottery process to be described later, it is determined whether the random value obtained as a result of executing the internal lottery is a value corresponding to the lottery data corresponding to any of the combinations, and the internal winning combination is determined. Actually, in this lottery data, settings 1 to 6 are prepared in which the winning probabilities of at least one combination are different, and a clerk of the game shop can arbitrarily select and set any set value. .

  In the present embodiment, the re-game player 2 (promotion replay 1) and the re-game player 3 (promotion replay 2) have a winning probability common to all the settings (setting 1 to setting 6) (for example, the re-game player 2 In the case of about 1/100 in the case of replaying combination 3, about 1/30). The small role 3 (push order bell) has a common internal winning probability (for example, about 1/8) common to all settings (setting 1 to setting 6), while the small role 4 (common bell) is internal depending on the setting. The winning probability is changed (for example, setting 1 is approximately 1/40, setting 2 is approximately 1/38, setting 3 is approximately 1/36, setting 4 is approximately 1/34, setting 5 is About 1/32, setting 6 is set to about 1/30, and the higher the setting, the higher the winning probability).

  In addition, although the internal winning probability of the small combination 4 (common bell) of the present embodiment is different for each setting, it may be different in at least two stages. For example, the settings 1 to 3 may be about 1/40, and the settings 4 to 6 may be about 1/35. In addition, the internal winning probability of the small role 4 (common bell) of the present embodiment is set so that the winning probability becomes higher as the setting becomes higher, but conversely, the winning probability becomes lower as the setting becomes higher. May be.

  Moreover, although the internal winning probability of the small combination 3 (push order bell) of the present embodiment is the internal winning probability common to all settings (setting 1 to setting 6), it is not limited to this. The maximum difference in the internal winning probability of the small role 3 (push order bell) between the settings (the difference between the maximum value and the minimum value of the internal winning probability; hereinafter also referred to as the setting difference) is the setting difference of the small role 4 (common bell) If so, the internal winning probability of the small combination 3 (push order bell) may be different for each setting.

<Type of gaming state>
Next, the types and transitions of the gaming state of the slot machine 1100 will be described. FIG. 56 is a game state transition diagram of the main control unit 1300 of the slot machine 1100.

  The main control unit 1300 of the slot machine 1100 can be broadly divided into a normal state (RT1-1), a navigation generation state 1 (RT1-2), a navigation generation state 2 (RT1-3), and a special role internal winning state (RT2). And a special gaming state (RT3). The normal state (RT1-1), the navigation generation state 1 (RT1-2), and the navigation generation state 2 (RT1-3) are collectively referred to as “normal game state”. Further, the navigation generation state 1 (RT1-2) and the navigation generation state 2 (RT1-3) may be collectively referred to as “navigation generation state” as described above. The navigation generation state is a state related to so-called AT (assist time), and is a state in which a notification effect (hereinafter referred to as “operation navigation”) regarding the operation content of the stop operation can be executed. That is, the navigation generation state refers to a gaming state in which an operation navigation including an operation timing or an operation sequence of stop operations is executed so as to bring a result advantageous to the player.

  Hereinafter, the gaming state of the slot machine 1100 will be described with reference to the drawings as appropriate.

<Normal state (RT1-1)>
In the normal state (RT1-1), the setting of the internal lottery result is largely lost (the special combination, the re-playing combination, and the small combination are not internally won), or the stop display result indicates which combination It is set so that the stop display result of losing that does not correspond to the symbol combination is generally derived, and the total number of medals to be acquired is less than the total number of inserted medals. Therefore, the normal state (RT1-1) is a gaming state that is disadvantageous for the player.

  The normal state (RT1-1) is set in the initial state, and when a predetermined number of operation navigations are executed in the navigation generation state 1 (RT1-2) or the navigation generation state 2 (RT1-3) (details). ), Or when the medals have been paid out in excess of the prescribed number in the special gaming state (RT3) (details will be described later), the normal state (RT1-1) is set.

  On the other hand, in the normal state (RT1-1), when the symbol combination corresponding to the replaying player 2 (promotional replay 1) is displayed on the active line (when winning the replaying player 2), the navigation generation state 1 (RT1-2). In addition, if the special role is won internally, the special status internal winning state (RT2) will be entered, and if the symbol combination corresponding to the special role is displayed on the active line (when winning the special role) , Transition to the special gaming state (RT3).

<Navigation occurrence state 1 (RT1-2)>
The navigation generation state 1 (RT1-2) is a gaming state in which operation navigation is executed in a game in which a small combination 3 (push order bell) or a small combination 4 (common bell) is won internally. In the present embodiment, operation navigation is executed when a small combination 3 (push order bell) or a small combination 4 (common bell) is won internally in a navigation generation state (RT1-2 and RT1-3 described later). In the state where the navigation is generated, not only when the small role 3 (push order bell) is won internally, but also when the small role 4 (common bell) is internally won, the operation navigation is executed because the role won internally This is to prevent the player from grasping whether it is 3 (push order bell) or small role 4 (common bell). The notification content of the operation navigation is determined by the main control unit 1300.

  In the navigation generation state 1 (RT1-2), when the symbol combination corresponding to the replaying player 2 (promotion replay 1) is displayed on the active line in the normal state (RT1-1) (winning the replaying player 2) If).

  Here, when setting the navigation generation state 1 (RT1-2), a specified number of lotteries using the specified number of times lottery table shown in FIG. 57A is executed, and one of 1, 2, or 3 is specified. Set to number of times. Here, in the case of the present embodiment, the specified number of times means the maximum number of operation navigations that are executed by winning the small role 3 (push order bell), and when the specified number of operation navigations is executed, Occurrence state 1 (RT1-2) ends, and the normal state (RT1-1) is entered. For example, when 3 is set as the specified number of times, the navigation generation state 1 (RT1-2) is performed when the operation navigation for the internal winning for the small role 3 (push order bell) is executed three times. RT1-2) ends.

  When the symbol combination corresponding to the replaying combination 3 is displayed on the active line in the navigation generation state 1 (RT1-2) (when winning the replaying combination 3), the navigation generation state 2 (RT1-3) ), And in the navigation generation state 1 (RT1-2), when a predetermined number of operation navigations are executed, the state shifts to the normal state (RT1-1). In addition, if the special role is won internally, the special status internal winning state (RT2) will be entered, and if the symbol combination corresponding to the special role is displayed on the active line (when winning the special role) , Transition to the special gaming state (RT3).

  As described above, in the navigation generation state 1 (RT1-2) of the present embodiment, the operation navigation is executed in both of the games won in the small role 3 (push order bell) or the small role 4 (common bell). The termination condition of the navigation generation state 1 (RT1-2) is the number of times of internal winning of the small role 3 (push order bell). This is because if the number of times of internal winning of the small role 4 (common bell) as well as the small role 3 (push order bell) is incorporated in the end condition of the navigation generation state 1 (RT1-2), the navigation generation state 1 ( In RT1-2), it becomes possible to end the navigation generation state 1 (RT1-2) without winning once in the small role 3 (push order bell) that makes it easy to win a prize. This is because a case of discouragement may occur. In other words, this is to ensure the fairness of the navigation generation state 1 which is an advantageous period.

<Navigation occurrence state 2 (RT1-3)>
The navigation generation state 2 (RT1-3) is similar to the navigation generation state 1 (RT1-2) in the game in which the small combination 3 (push order bell) or the small combination 4 (common bell) is won internally. The gaming state to be executed.

  The navigation generation state 2 (RT1-3) is displayed when the symbol combination corresponding to the replaying player 3 (promotion replay 2) is displayed on the active line in the navigation generating state 1 (RT1-2) (to the replaying player 2). Is set). In other words, when the player has won the re-playing player 3 (promotion replay 2) before all the operation navigations of the specified number of times (for example, 1-3 times) are executed in the navigation generation state 1 (RT1-2), the navigation generation state 2 (RT1-3) is set.

  Here, when the navigation generation state 2 (RT1-3) is set, a specified number of times lottery using the specified number of times lottery table shown in FIG. 57B is executed, and any of 30, 40, or 50 is specified. Set to number of times. For example, when the specified number of times is 30, when the operation navigation for the internal winning for the small role 3 (push order bell) is executed 30 times in the navigation generation state 2 (RT1-3), the navigation generation state 2 (RT1-3) ) Ends. Since the specified number of times set in the navigation generation state 2 (RT1-3) is larger than the specified number of times set in the navigation generation state 1 (RT1-2), the period of the navigation generation state (hereinafter referred to as “navigation period”). ), The navigation generation state 2 (RT1-3) is more advantageous than the navigation generation state 1 (RT1-2).

  In the navigation generation state 2 (RT1-3), when the specified number of operation navigations has been executed, the state shifts to the normal state (RT1-1). In addition, if the special role is won internally, the special status internal winning state (RT2) will be entered, and if the symbol combination corresponding to the special role is displayed on the active line (when winning the special role) , Transition to the special gaming state (RT3).

<Special role internal winning state (RT2)>
The special combination internal winning state (RT2) is a state in which the internal winning flag corresponding to the special combination 1 or special combination 2 is set to ON, and when the player performs a stop operation at a predetermined timing, This is a gaming state in which a symbol combination corresponding to the corresponding special combination can be displayed.

  The special combination internal winning state (RT2) is set when the special combination is won internally in the normal gaming state (normal state, navigation generation state 1, navigation generation state 2). On the other hand, when the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination won internally is displayed in the special combination internal winning state (RT2), the state shifts to the special gaming state (RT3).

<Special gaming state (RT3)>
The special game state (RT3) is a game state that is beneficial to the player. That is, the special gaming state (RT3) is a gaming state in which the total number of medals to be acquired exceeds the total number of medals inserted.

  The special game state (RT3) is set when a special combination won internally is won in the normal game state (normal state, navigation generation state 1, navigation generation state 2) or special combination internal winning state (RT2). . On the other hand, in the special game state (RT3), when the specified number is paid out, the state shifts to the normal state (RT1-1). Specifically, in the case of shifting to the special game state (RT3) based on the display of the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination 1, the normal state (RT1-1) when the payout of more than 300 medals is completed. ). In addition, when the game state shifts to the special game state (RT3) based on the display of the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination 2, the game shifts to the normal state (RT1-1) when the payout of more than 100 medals is completed. To do.

  In the present embodiment, the special game state (RT3) ends when a specified number of payouts are executed. For example, the special game state (RT3) ends when a predetermined combination (for example, a single bonus) is won, or further May be terminated when the number of times (for example, 8 times) has been won or when a predetermined number of times (for example, 6 times) has been played.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, when winning the re-game player 2 (promotion replay 2) in the normal state (RT1-1), the navigation state 1 (RT1-2) is entered, but the normal state (RT1-1). When the re-game player 2 (promotion replay 2) is won internally, the navigation state 1 (RT1-2) may be entered. Similarly, when winning the re-playing player 3 (promotional replay 3) in the navigation generation state 1 (RT1-2), the state is shifted to the navigation generation state 2 (RT1-3), but the navigation generation state 1 (RT1-2) ), When the re-gamer 3 (promotional replay 3) is internally won, the navigation state 2 (RT1-3) may be entered.

  In the present embodiment, when the special gaming state (RT3) is finished, the state is uniformly shifted to the normal state (RT1-1). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the special role is started from the navigation generation state 2 (RT1-3). When transitioning to the internal winning state (RT2) and the special gaming state (RT3), when the special gaming state (RT3) ends, the navigation generation state 2 (RT1-3) may be transitioned to.

  Further, in the normal gaming state of the present embodiment, no particular mention was made regarding the change of the internal winning probability of the re-gamer, but the internal winning probability in the navigation generation state 2 (RT1-3) is set to another normal gaming state (RT1). −1, RT1-2) may be set higher.

<Navi occurrence state>
Next, the navigation occurrence state will be specifically described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 is a time chart showing an outline of the operation of the slot machine 1100 during the navigation period of the navigation generation state 1 where the specified number of times is 1.

  Here, the operation navigation counter is a counter that counts the number of executions of the operation navigation that is executed when the small winning combination 3 (push order bell) is won internally. As the counter value of the operation navigation counter, the specified number of times determined by the specified number of times lottery is set as an initial value, and the counter value is set to 1 every time the small portion 3 (push order bell) is internally won and the operation navigation is executed. Subtracted. When the counter value of the operation navigation counter is 0, the navigation generation state 1 (navigation period) ends. Although not shown in FIG. 58, as a premise, since the re-game player 2 (promotion replay 1) is won in the game immediately before the navigation period, the navigation period in the navigation generation state 1 is started.

  FIG. 58 shows that an internal winning is performed for the small role 4 (common bell) in the third game and the fifth game in the navigation period, and the operation navigation is executed, and an internal winning is performed for the small role 3 (push order bell) in the seventh game. This shows a case where operation navigation is executed. That is, the navigation period in the navigation generation state 1 is 7 games. Note that each of time points t1 to t7 in FIG. 58 indicates the time point of the start lever operation in each game.

  In the present embodiment, in a game in which a small combination 3 (push order bell) or a small combination 4 (common bell) is won internally, (1) an operation navigation by the main control unit 1300, and (2) a first sub control unit 1400 and Operation navigation by the second sub-control unit 1500 is executed. Since the main control unit 1300 determines the notification content (operation order) of the operation navigation as described above, the main control unit 1300 has won the small combination 3 (push order bell) or the small combination 4 (common bell) internally. In the game, an operation navigation command including navigation information indicating the notification content of the operation navigation is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 1400. As a result, in the operation navigation by the first sub control unit 400 and the second sub control unit 1500, it is possible to notify the same notification content as the operation navigation by the main control unit 1300. Note that the main control unit 1300 selects the correct operation order as the notification content of the operation navigation in the game in which the small combination 3 (push order bell) is internally won in the navigation generation state, and the small combination 4 in the navigation generation state. In a game in which (common bell) is won internally, one of the six options is selected as the notification content of the operation navigation.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the operation navigation is executed not only when the small combination 3 (push order bell) is internally won in the navigation generation state but also when the small combination 4 (common bell) is internally won. . This is due to the following reason.

  In the past, even if there is a setting difference in the internal winning probability of the small combination 4 (common bell; the combination of the same symbol combination corresponding to the small combination 3 in the winning line), in the period that is not the navigation period, If it is difficult to distinguish between the small role 4 (common bell) and the small role 3 (push order bell) that was accidentally won as a result of the operation, the set value is determined from the number of winning points for the small role 4 (common bell). It was difficult to guess. However, in the navigation period, when the operation navigation is executed in the game won internally by the small role 3 (push order bell) and the operation navigation is not executed in the game where the small role 4 (common bell) is internally won, If the small combination 4 wins without operating navigation, the player will be inferred that the internal winning combination was the small combination 4. That is, in the navigation period, there is a problem that it becomes easier to predict the set value from the number of winnings of the small role 4 than in other periods. In this embodiment, in order to eliminate such a problem, in the navigation period, in addition to the small role 3 (push order bell), the operation navigation is executed when the small role 4 (common bell) is won internally. It is difficult to predict the set value from the number of winnings in the role 4 (common bell).

  Here, the operation navigation by the main control unit 1300 is specifically a 7-segment lighting effect using the payout number display machine 1127, and the operation navigation by the first sub control unit 1400 and the second sub control unit 1500 Is an image display effect using the liquid crystal display device 1157.

  FIG. 59A is a diagram showing a lighting manner of the operation navigation by the main control unit 1300. For example, when the next stop operation is a stop operation for the left reel 1110, the 7-segment data for displaying the letter “L” is selected and the payout number display 1127 is turned on, and the next stop operation is the middle reel 1111. In the case of the stop operation for the right reel 1112, the 7-segment data for displaying the letter “C” is selected and the payout number display 1127 is turned on. The 7-segment data for displaying the letter “R” is selected and the payout number display 1127 is turned on.

  FIG. 59B is a diagram for explaining a display mode of the operation navigation by the first sub control unit 1400 and the second sub control unit 1500. For example, when “left middle right” is selected from the six choices as the notification content of the operation navigation, a character image in which the number “123” is drawn from the left to the right is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1157. . Hereinafter, the character image of the operation navigation is referred to as operation navigation image d10.

  FIG. 59 (c) shows the transition of the notification mode of the operation navigation when “right middle left” is selected as the notification content of the operation navigation. The slot machine 1100 displays the letter “R” on the payout number display 1127 and the operation navigation image d10 composed of the letters “321” on the liquid crystal display device 1157 at the time t1A of the start lever operation. Thereby, the player can grasp that the right reel 1112 is the first stop reel. Next, the slot machine 1100 displays the character “C” on the payout number display 1127 and the operation composed of the characters “32” on the liquid crystal display device 1157 at the time t1B when the first stop operation is performed. A navigation image d10 is displayed. Thereby, the player can grasp that the middle reel 1111 is the second stop reel. Next, at the time point t1C at which the second stop operation is performed, the slot machine 1100 displays the letter “C” on the payout number display unit 1127 and the operation constituted by the letter “3” on the liquid crystal display device 1157. A navigation image d10 is displayed. Thereby, the player can grasp that the left reel 1110 is the third stop reel. Finally, when the third stop operation is performed, the slot machine 1100 ends the display of the payout number display device 1127 and ends the display of the operation navigation image d10 of the liquid crystal display device 1157.

  FIG. 60 is a time chart showing an outline of the operation of the slot machine 1100 in the navigation period of the navigation generation state 1 where the specified number of times is 1, as in FIG. FIG. 60A shows the case where the navigation period ends in two games, and FIG. 60B shows the case where the navigation period ends in one game.

  In FIG. 60 (a), a small role 4 (common bell) is internally won in the first game during the navigation period, and an operation navigation is performed. In a second game, small role 3 (push order bell) is internally won and operated. Since navigation is executed, the case where the navigation period ends in two games is shown. On the other hand, FIG. 60 (b) shows a case where the navigation period is completed in one game because the internal navigation is executed by winning the small role 3 (push order bell) in the first game in the navigation period. When the player performs a stop operation according to the operation navigation, the stop mode of the reels 1110 to 1112 is the same regardless of whether the small role 3 (push order bell) or the small role 4 (common bell) is won internally. Therefore, it is impossible to grasp whether the small role 3 (push order bell) or the small role 4 (common bell) is won internally. However, when a stop operation that does not follow the operation navigation is performed, for example, when an operation mistake is made, when a small combination 3 (push order bell) is won internally, it is not won, while a small combination 4 (common bell) is won internally. Since the winning sometimes occurs, after all the reels 1110 to 1112 are stopped, it is possible to grasp whether the small winning combination 3 or the small winning combination 4 is won internally from the stop mode of all the reels 1110 to 1112.

  FIG. 61 is a time chart showing the lighting timing of the navigation occurrence state notification lamp 1190. The navigation occurrence state notification lamp 1190 of the present embodiment starts to light at a time t11 when a medal is inserted (automatic insertion) for the next game of the game that has won the re-playing game 2 (promotion replay 1) in the normal state (RT1-1). To do. The liquid crystal display device 1157 also displays the background image d2 indicating the navigation generation state 1 from the time t11 when the medal is inserted, and the speakers 1272 and 1277 also output the sound indicating the navigation state 1 from the time t11 when the medal is inserted.

  When the navigation generation state 1 shifts to the navigation generation state 2, the navigation generation state continues, so the navigation generation state notification lamp 1190 continues to be lit. When the game state is entered, the navigation generation state is ended, and thus the lighting of the navigation generation state notification lamp 1190 is ended (not lighted).

  FIG. 62 is a diagram for explaining a difference between notification modes when the last operation navigation is executed in the navigation period and when the non-last operation navigation is executed. The last operation navigation means the operation navigation for the specified number of times for the internal winning of the small role 3 (push order bell). For example, when the specified number of times is 3, the internal winning of the small role 3 (push order bell) This is the third operation navigation for. On the other hand, the non-last operation navigation means an operation navigation that is not the last operation navigation. The operation navigation that is not the last includes both an operation navigation for the small win 3 (push order bell) internal winning and an operation navigation for the small win 4 (common bell) internal winning.

  FIG. 62 (a) is a diagram showing an operation notification mode when non-last operation navigation is executed in the navigation period. In the operation navigation which is not the last, as shown in FIG. 62A, the order of the stop operation is notified using the liquid crystal display device 1157 and the payout number display 1127. That is, the liquid crystal display device 1157 displays the operation navigation image d10 on the background image d2.

  On the other hand, FIG. 62B is a diagram showing an operation notification mode when the last operation navigation is executed in the navigation period. In the last operation navigation, as shown in FIG. 62 (b), the same notification mode as the operation navigation that is not the last regarding the operation content (specifically, the display mode of the operation navigation image d10 and the lighting mode of the payout number display unit 1127) Is the same), and the order of the stop operation is notified using the liquid crystal display device 1157 and the payout number display 1127. However, in the last operation navigation, in addition to this, a black line image d20 is displayed on the periphery of the outer frame of the liquid crystal display device 1157, and the shutters 1163a and b are vibrated left and right. That is, the last operation navigation has the same notification content as the operation navigation that is not the last, but has a different notification mode from the operation navigation that is not the last as a whole effect.

  As a result, the player can perform a stop operation without being confused by the contents of the notification, and can also grasp that the navigation period (navigation occurrence state) ends. In the present embodiment, since the specification is such that the player does not grasp the internal winning combination of the game that executes the operation navigation, the number of remaining operation navigations cannot be notified. For this reason, the navigation period may end without notice and the player may be confused. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the last operation navigation is notified in a special notification mode to indicate that it is the last, so as not to confuse the player.

  FIG. 63 is a time chart when the navigation period ends and when the navigation period continues. FIG. 63A shows a case where the navigation period in the navigation generation state 1 (RT1-2) in which the specified number of times is 1 ends in two games. In this case, the start lever operation time point of the first game in the normal state (RT1-1), which is the next game after the second game in the navigation generation state 1 (RT1-2) (game played in the small role 3 internal winning) A period end effect indicating that the navigation period has ended is executed for one game from t3. As described above, in this embodiment, when the navigation period ends, the period end effect for one game is executed.

  On the other hand, FIG. 63 (b) shows that the replaying role 3 (promotion replay 3) is won in the second game in the navigation period in the navigation generation state 1 (RT1-2) where the specified number of times is 1, and the next It is a time chart when the navigation generation state 2 (RT1-3) is started from the game. In this case, the navigation generation state 1 (RT1-2) is once ended, but (1) the navigation generation state 2 (from the time t1 of the start lever operation of the first game in the navigation generation state 1 (RT1-2)). RT1-3) until the time t3 of the start lever operation of the first game, the navigation generation state 1 (RT1-2), and after the time t3, the navigation generation state 2 (RT1-3), and the navigation period is continuous. Therefore, the period end effect is not executed after the end of the navigation generation state 1 (RT1-2). That is, by making the condition for ending the navigation generation state 1 (RT1-2) and the condition for starting the navigation generation state 2 (RT1-3) the same, it follows the navigation generation state 1 (RT1-2). Thus, the navigation generation state 2 (RT1-3) can be executed.

  In addition, although the navigation generation state of this embodiment was started from the next game of the game determined to shift to the navigation generation state, it is not limited to this. A start lottery may be executed in each game after the next game, and the navigation generation state may be started when winning. In addition, the navigation generation state of the present embodiment is terminated in the game in which the specified number of small roles 3 (push order bell) is won internally, but is not limited thereto. The navigation generation state may be terminated after a predetermined number of games (for example, 3 games, etc.) have elapsed from a game in which the specified number of small roles 3 (push order bell) has been won internally.

<Operation of slot machine>
Hereinafter, processing of the main control unit 1300, the first sub control unit 1400, and the second sub control unit 1500 will be described with reference to the drawings.

<Main control unit main processing>
First, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 1304 of the main control unit 1300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of the main control unit.

  As described above, the main control unit 1300 is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 1338 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 1304 of the basic circuit 1302 to which this activation signal has been input starts reset by a reset interrupt, and executes main control unit main processing shown in FIG. 64 according to a control program stored in advance in the ROM 1306.

  When power is turned on, first, various initial settings are made in step S301. In this initial setting, setting of the stack initial value to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 1304, setting of interrupt inhibition, initial setting of the I / O 1310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 1308, operation permission to the WDT 1314, and initial setting Set the value.

  In step S302, a bet number setting / start operation accepting process is executed. Here, it is checked whether or not a medal has been inserted, and preparation for sending an insertion command indicating that a medal has been inserted is made. When a re-game player is won in the previous game, the same number of medals as the number of medals inserted in the previous game are processed, so that it is not necessary for the player to insert medals. Also, it is checked whether or not the start lever 1135 has been operated. If there is an operation of the start lever 1135, the process proceeds to step S303.

  In step S303, a winning line determination process for determining the number of inserted medals and determining an effective winning line is performed.

  In step S304, a random number acquisition process for acquiring a random number generated by the random number generation circuit 1316 is performed.

  In step S305, a winning combination internal lottery process is performed. In the winning combination internal lottery process, the winning combination lottery table stored in the ROM 1306 is read in accordance with the current gaming state, and the internal lottery is performed using this and the random value acquired in step S304. Preparation for transmitting an internal lottery command indicating the result to the first sub-control unit 1400 is made. As a result of the internal lottery, when any winning combination (including an operating combination) is won internally, the flag of the winning combination is turned on.

  In step S306, a reel stop data selection process for selecting reel stop data is performed based on the internal lottery result of the winning combination internal lottery process. The reel stop data is stored in the ROM 1306 of the main control unit 1300.

  In step S307, main control unit / operation navigation setting processing (details will be described later) for setting operation navigation of the main control unit 300 is executed.

  In step S308, a reel rotation start process is executed to start rotation of all reels 1110 to 1112.

  In step S309, a reel stop control process is performed. In the reel stop control process, the stop buttons 1137 to 1139 can be received. When any one of the stop buttons is pressed, a reel stop data stop table is set to stop the reel corresponding to the pressed stop button. With reference to any of the reels 1110 to 1112 according to the number of frames drawn in the stop table. When all the reels 1110 to 1112 are stopped, the process proceeds to step S310. In this step S309, for each stop operation, a stop button reception command relating to the stop buttons 1137 to 1139 that have been stopped (specifically, for the first stop operation, a stop button reception 1 command, a second stop operation) In response to the stop button reception 2 command and the third stop operation, the stop button reception 3 command) is prepared for transmission to the first sub-control unit 1400. Reel stop command related to the stop position (specifically, a reel stop 1 command for the first stop reel, a reel stop 2 command for the second stop operation, and a reel stop for the third stop operation. 3 commands) to the first sub-control unit 1400.

  In step S310, a winning determination process for determining a winning is performed. In this winning determination process, when a pattern combination corresponding to any winning combination is displayed on the activated winning line 1114, it is determined that the winning combination has been won. For example, if “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” is aligned on the activated winning line, it is determined that the small role 1 (watermelon) has been won. Also, in this step S310, preparation is made for transmitting a winning determination command indicating the result of the winning determination to the first sub-control unit 1400.

  In step S311, a medal grant process is performed. In the medal granting process, if any winning combination with payout is won, the number of medals corresponding to the winning combination is paid out according to the number of winning lines.

  In step S312, game state control processing (details will be described later) is performed. In the gaming state control process, processing relating to transition of each gaming state is performed, and the gaming state is shifted when the start condition or the end condition is satisfied. Also, preparation is made for transmitting a game state command including information indicating the current game state.

  Thus, one game is completed. Thereafter, the game proceeds by returning to step S302 and repeating the above-described processing.

  Note that the various commands prepared in the above steps are transmitted in a command setting transmission process (step S1106 in FIG. 65) of the main control unit timer interrupt process described later.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 1304 of the main control unit 1300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  The main control unit 1300 includes a counter timer 1312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, about once every 2 ms), and the main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The process is started at a predetermined cycle.

  In step S1101, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU 1304 to the stack area is performed.

  In step S1102, the count value of the WDT 1314 exceeds the initial set value (32.8 ms in the present embodiment), so that no WDT interrupt occurs (so as not to detect processing abnormality), the WDT 1314 is periodically In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every about 2 ms, which is the period of the main control unit timer interrupt.

  In step S1103, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port status update process, the detection signals of the sensor circuits 1320 of the various sensors 1318 are input via the input ports of the I / O 1310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals, and each of the various sensors 318 is partitioned in the RAM 308. Store in the provided signal state storage area.

  In step S1104, various game processes are executed, and processes according to the interrupt status are executed.

  In step S1105, timer update processing is performed. More specifically, various timers are updated for each time unit.

  In step S <b> 1106, command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands prepared for transmission are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 1400. The first sub-control unit 1400 can determine the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 1300 by the command type included in the received output schedule information, and is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the contents of effect control can be determined.

  In step S1107, external output signal setting processing is performed. In this external output signal setting process, game information stored in the RAM 1308 is output to an information input circuit 1652 that is separate from the slot machine 1100 via the information output circuit 1334.

  In step S1108, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, first, the signal states of the various sensors 1318 stored in the signal state storage area in step S1103 are read, and the presence or absence of errors relating to medal insertion abnormality and medal payout abnormality is monitored. (Not shown) Error processing is executed. Further, according to the current gaming state, the medal selector 1170 (medal blocker in which the solenoid provided in the medal selector 1170 operates), various lamps 1336, and various 7-segment (SEG) indicators are set.

  In step S1109, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. If the low voltage signal is on (when the power supply is detected to be cut off), the process proceeds to step S1111. If the low voltage signal is off (when the power supply is not cut off), the process proceeds to step S1110.

  In step S1110, various processes for ending the timer interrupt end process are performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S1101 is set in each original register. Thereafter, the process returns to the main control unit main process shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, in step S1111, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 as return data, and power-off processing such as initialization of input / output ports is performed. After that, the process returns to the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG.

<Main control unit / operation navigation setting process>
Next, the main control unit / operation navigation setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the main control unit / operation navigation setting process in step S307 of FIG.

  In step S401, it is determined whether or not the gaming state of the main control unit 1300 is in the navigation generation state (RT1-2 or RT1-3). If the game state of the main control unit 1300 is the navigation generation state, the process proceeds to step S402, and if not, the main control unit / operation navigation setting process ends.

  In step S402, it is determined whether or not an internal win has been made to the small role 3 (push order bell) in the game. In the game, if the small winning combination 3 (push order bell) is won internally, the process proceeds to step S403, and if not, the process proceeds to step S406.

  In step S403, the correct operation lottery is executed to determine the correct operation content, and the determined correct operation content is the content of the operation navigation when the small role 3 (push order bell) is won internally. For details, select any one of the six operation sequences from “Left / Right / Right”, “Right / Left / Right”, “Middle / Left / Right”, “Middle / Right / Left”, “Right / Left / Right”, The operation order of the correct stop operation for winning the winning combination 3 is determined as the content of the operation navigation. For example, “right middle left” is the content of the operation navigation.

  In step S404, the operational navigation effect is set according to the content of the operational navigation determined in step S403. As a result, the operation navigation by the main control unit 1300 is executed (see FIGS. 59A and 59C).

  In step S405, 1 is subtracted from the counter value of the operation navigation counter, and the process proceeds to step S409.

  On the other hand, in step S406, it is determined whether or not the small role 4 (common bell) has been internally won in the game. If the small winning combination 4 is won internally in the game, the process proceeds to step S407. If not, the main control unit / operation navigation setting process is terminated.

  In step S407, the contents of the operation navigation in the case where the small winning combination 4 (common bell) is internally won are determined. Specifically, the operation order is selected from six options of “left middle right”, “left / right middle”, “middle left / right”, “middle right left”, “right left middle”, and “right middle left”. . For example, “right middle left” is set as the content of the operation navigation.

  In step S408, the operation navigation effect is set according to the content of the operation navigation determined in step S407. As a result, the operation navigation by the main control unit 1300 is executed (see FIG. 59 (a)). After the process of step S408 is complete | finished, it progresses to step S409.

  In step S409, preparation is made for transmitting an operation navigation command including the operation content of the operation navigation, the value of the operation navigation counter, etc. to the first sub-control unit 1400. As a result, the first sub-control unit 1400 and the second sub-control unit 1500 execute operation navigation by the first sub-control unit 1400 and the second sub-control unit 1500 based on the contents of the received operation navigation command (FIG. 59). (See (b) and (c)).

<Game state control processing>
Next, the gaming state control process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the gaming state control process in step S312 of FIG.

  In step S501, it is determined whether or not a special combination (specifically, special combination 1 or 2) is won in the game. If a special combination is won in the game, the process proceeds to step S502; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S503.

  In step S502, the game state of the main control unit 1300 is set to the special game state (RT3). After the process of step S502 is complete | finished, it progresses to step S516.

  In step S503, it is determined whether or not a special combination (specifically, special combination 1 or 2) is won internally in the game. If the special winning combination is won in the game, the process proceeds to step S504, and if not, the process proceeds to step S505.

  In step S504, the game state of the main control unit 1300 is set to the special combination internal winning state (RT2). After the process of step S504 is complete | finished, it progresses to step S516.

  In step S505, it is determined whether or not the gaming state of the main control unit 1300 is in the normal state (RT1-1). If the gaming state of the main control unit 1300 is in the normal state (RT1-1), the process proceeds to step S506, and if not, the process proceeds to step 508.

  In step S506, it is determined whether or not the re-game player 2 (promotion replay 1) is won in the game. If the re-gamer 2 is won in the game, the process proceeds to step S507, and if not, the process proceeds to step S516.

  In step S507, the gaming state of the main control unit 1300 is set to the navigation generation state 1 (RT1-2). In step S507, a specified number of times of lottery is executed to determine the specified number of times of operation navigation in the navigation generation state 1 (RT1-2) (see FIG. 57A). Further, the determined value of the specified number of times of operation navigation is set as the initial value of the operation navigation counter. After the process of step S507 is complete | finished, it progresses to step S516.

  In step S508, it is determined whether or not the gaming state of the main control unit 1300 is in the navigation generation state 1 (RT1-2). If the gaming state of the main control unit 1300 is in the navigation generation state 1 (RT1-2), the process proceeds to step S509, and if not, the process proceeds to step 513.

  In step S509, it is determined whether or not the re-gamer 3 (promotion replay 2) is won in the game. If the re-gamer 3 is won in the game, the process proceeds to step S510, and if not, the process proceeds to step S511.

  In step S510, the game state of the main control unit 1300 is set to the navigation generation state 2 (RT1-3). In step S510, a specified number of times of lottery is executed to determine the number of times of operation navigation in the navigation generation state 2 (RT1-3) (see FIG. 57B). Further, the determined value of the specified number of times of operation navigation is set as the initial value of the operation navigation counter. After the process of step S510 is complete | finished, it progresses to step S516.

  In step S511, it is determined whether or not the specified number of operation navigations has been executed in the navigation generation state 1 (RT1-2). If the specified number of times of operation navigation has been executed in the navigation generation state 1 (RT1-2), that is, if the value of the operation navigation counter is 0, the process proceeds to step S512. Otherwise, the process proceeds to step S516.

  In step S512, the gaming state of the main control unit 1300 is set to the normal state (RT1-1). After the process of step S512 is complete | finished, it progresses to step S516.

  In step S513, it is determined whether the game state of the main control unit 1300 is in the navigation generation state 2 (RT1-3). If the gaming state of the main control unit 1300 is in the navigation generation state 2 (RT1-3), the process proceeds to step S514, and if not, the process proceeds to step 516.

  In step S514, it is determined whether or not the specified number of operation navigations has been executed in the navigation generation state 2 (RT1-3). If the specified number of operation navigations has been executed in the navigation generation state 2 (RT1-3), that is, if the value of the operation navigation counter is 0, the process proceeds to step S515, and if not, the process proceeds to step S516.

  In step S515, the gaming state of the main control unit 1300 is set to the normal state (RT1-1). After the process of step S515 is complete | finished, it progresses to step S516.

  In step S516, other game state control processing is executed. For example, in the special game state (RT3), when there are medals exceeding a prescribed number, the game state of the main control unit 1300 is set to the normal state (RT1-1). In addition, it prepares to transmit a game state command indicating the game state of the main control unit 1300.

<Processing of first sub-control unit>
Next, processing of the first sub control unit 1400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 68A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 1404 of the first sub-control unit 1400. FIG. 68B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the first sub control unit 1400. FIG. 68C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the first sub control unit 1400.

  First, the main process of the first sub control unit 1400 will be described with reference to FIG.

  When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S3601. In this initialization process, initial setting of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 1408, and the like are performed. In this process, the RAM 1408 is provided with an area for storing internal winning information that is information representing the result of internal winning and an area for storing RT update information that is information indicating the gaming state.

  In step S3602, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S3603.

  In step S3603, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

  In step S3604, command processing that is processing corresponding to each command received from the main control unit 1300 is executed.

  In step S3605, an effect control process is performed. Here, the preparation for the effect is made according to the effect reservation information in the effect reservation area provided in the RAM 1408. This preparation includes, for example, performing a process such as reading effect data from the ROM 1406 and performing an effect data update process when the effect data needs to be updated. For example, in the present embodiment, in the navigation generation state, when the small winning combination 3 (push order bell) or the small winning combination 4 (common bell) is won internally, the first sub control unit 1400 and the second sub control unit 1500 Set operation navigation.

  In step S3606, sound control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S3605. For example, if there is a command to the sound source IC 1418 in the effect data read in step S3605, this command is output to the sound source IC 1418.

  In step S3607, lamp control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S3605. For example, if there is a command to the various lamps 1420 in the effect data read in step S3605, this command is output to the drive circuit 1422.

  In step S3608, information output processing is performed to perform setting for transmitting a command to the second sub-control unit 1500 based on the processing result in step S3605. For example, if there is a command to be transmitted to the second sub control unit 1500 in the effect data read in step S3605, the control command is set to be output, and the process returns to step S3602.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the first sub control unit 1400 will be described with reference to FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub control unit 1400 detects the strobe signal output from the main control unit 1300. In step S3701 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the main control unit 1300 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 1408 as an unprocessed command.

  Next, the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 1404 of the first sub control unit 1400 will be described with reference to FIG. The first sub-control unit 1400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms), and this timer interrupt is used as a trigger to perform timer interrupt processing. Execute in the cycle.

  In step S3801, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 1408 described in step S3602 in the first sub control unit main process shown in FIG. 68A, and the original timer variable storage area is stored. Therefore, in step S3602, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step S3802, a command is transmitted to the second sub control unit 1500 set in step S3608, an effect random number value is updated, and the like.

<Processing of second sub-control unit>
Next, the processing of the second sub control unit 1500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 69A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 1504 of the second sub-control unit 1500. FIG. 69B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the second sub-control unit 1500. FIG. 69C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the second sub control unit 1500. FIG. 69D is a flowchart of the image control process of the second sub control unit 1500.

  First, in step S5001 in FIG. 69A, various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S5401. In this initialization process, input / output port initialization, storage area initialization in the RAM 1508, and the like are performed.

  In step S5402, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S5403.

  In step S5403, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

  In step S5404, command processing is performed. In the command processing, the CPU 1504 of the second sub control unit 1500 determines whether a command is received from the CPU 1404 of the first sub control unit 1400.

  In step S5405, effect control processing is performed. Specifically, if there is a new command in step S5404, processing corresponding to this command is performed. In addition, processing such as reading out other effect data from the ROM 1506 is performed, and updating of the effect data is included when the effect data needs to be updated.

  In step S5406, shutter control processing is performed based on the processing result in step S5405. For example, if there is a shutter control command in the effect data read in step S5405, shutter control corresponding to this command is performed.

  In step S5407, image control processing (described in detail later) is performed based on the processing result in step S5405. For example, if there is an image control command in the effect data read in step S5405, image control corresponding to this command is performed. For example, when the operation navigation by the first sub control unit 1400 and the second sub control unit 1500 is executed, image control for displaying the operation navigation image d10 is executed. When this image control process ends, the process returns to step S5402.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the second sub control unit 1500 will be described with reference to FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub control unit 1500 detects a strobe signal output from the first sub control unit 1400.

  In step S5601 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the first sub control unit 1400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 1508.

  Next, the second sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 1504 of the second sub control unit 1500 will be described with reference to FIG. The second sub-control unit 1500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms). Execute in the cycle.

  In step S5601, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 1508 described in step S5402 in the second sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. 69A, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Accordingly, in step S5402, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step S5602, an effect random number update process is performed.

  Next, the image control process in step S5407 in the main process of the second sub control unit 1500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

  In step S5701, an image data transfer instruction is issued. Here, the CPU 1504 first swaps the designation of the display areas A and B in the VRAM 1536. As a result, the one-frame image stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the effect image display device 1157. Next, the CPU 1504 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 1506), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 1518), and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 1516 based on the position information table and the like, and then the image from the ROM 1506 to the VRAM 1518. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 1516 transfers image data from the ROM 1506 to the VRAM 1518 based on the command set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 1516 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 1504.

  In step S5702, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal from VDP 1516 is input. If a transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S5703. If not, a transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for it.

  In step S5703, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table and attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 1518 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 1518 in step S5701, the CPU 1504 has information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis and image size of the VRAM 1518). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), transparency, etc.) are instructed to the VDP 1516. The VDP 1516 performs parameter setting in accordance with the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

  In step S5704, a drawing instruction is performed. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 1504 instructs the VDP 1516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 1516 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer in accordance with an instruction from the CPU 1504.

  In step S5705, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 1516 based on the end of image drawing has been input. If a generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S5706; Wait for input.

  In step S5706, a scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 1508 and counts how many scene images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

  As described above, according to this embodiment, even if a difference is provided in the internal winning probability of the small role 4 (common bell) according to the settings (settings 1 to 6), the normal gaming state, that is, the normal state (RT1-1) In the navigation generation state (RT1-2, RT1-3), it is difficult to grasp the winning of the small role 4 (common bell), so it is difficult to guess the set value in a short game. Specifically, in the normal state (RT1-1), the small combination 3 (push order bell) having the same symbol combination as the small combination 4 (common bell) may also win, so the small combination 3 (push order bell) or small It is difficult to determine which of the combination 4 (common bell) is won. In the navigation generation state (RT1-2, RT1-3), the operation navigation is executed for the internal winning of each of the small role 3 (push order bell) and the small role 4 (common bell). If the stop operation is performed according to this, a winning will be won in any case, and it is difficult to determine which of the small role 3 (push order bell) or the small role 4 (common bell) is won.

<Other variations>
・ Subdivision of small combination and re-playing combination In the above embodiment (fourth embodiment), when the small combination 3 (push order bell) is won internally, the correct operation sequence is determined by executing the correct operation lottery. (Refer to step S403 in FIG. 75) As shown in FIG. 70, the small combinations 3 (push order bells) are subdivided, and different correct operations are performed corresponding to the subdivided small roles 3 (push order bells). An order may be assigned (Modification 1). That is, one reel stop data may be assigned to one internal winning combination. According to the first modification, the correct operation order can be determined without newly executing the correct operation lottery.

  For example, when the small winning combination 3-1 (bell 1) shown in FIG. 70 is won internally, “left middle right” is the correct operation order, and when the small winning combination 3-3 (bell 3) is internally won. “Middle right left” is the correct operation order. The internal winning probabilities of the small combination 3-1 (Bell 1) to the small combination 3-6 (Bell 6) are the same.

  In the embodiment (fourth embodiment), when the normal state (RT1-1) is shifted to the navigation generation state 1 (RT1-2), and the navigation generation state 1 (RT1-2) is the navigation generation state 2. In the case of shifting to (RT1-3), the specified number of times is determined by executing the specified number of lotteries (see FIG. 57), but as shown in FIG. (Modification 2). According to the second modification, the specified number of times can be determined without newly executing the specified number of times lottery. FIG. 71A is a schematic diagram of a specified number of times lottery table used when the navigation state is shifted to the navigation generation state 1 (RT1-2), and FIG. 71B is a navigation generation state 2 (RT1-3). It is a schematic diagram of the specified number of times lottery table used when it transfers.

  For example, when the re-game player 2-1 is won in the normal state (RT1-1), the specified number of times in the navigation generation state 1 (RT1-2) is once, and in the navigation generation state 1 (RT1-2) again. When winning a game combination 3-2, the prescribed number of times in the navigation generation state 2 (RT1-3) is 40 times. It should be noted that the internal winning probabilities of each of the re-game players 2-1 to 2-3 and the re-game players 3-1 to 3-3 may be the same, The higher the set value, the higher the internal winning probability of the re-gamer who is assigned the predetermined number of times.

-Variation of operation navigation In the above embodiment (fourth embodiment), the operation navigation is always executed when the small winning combination 4 (common bell) is internally won in the navigation generation state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as shown in FIG. 72, when the small winning combination 4 (common bell) is won internally in the navigation generation state, the operation navigation may not be executed (Modification 3). FIG. 72 is a time chart showing an outline of the operation of the slot machine 1100 in the navigation period of the third modification.

  In the example shown in FIG. 72, when the small winning combination 4 (common bell) is won internally in the second game in the navigation period, the operation navigation is executed, while the small winning combination 4 (common bell) is internal in the third game in the navigation period. If you win, the navigation will not be executed. It becomes even more difficult to infer the winning frequency of small role 4 (common bell). From the viewpoint of making it difficult to infer whether the small role 3 (Push order bell) or the small role 4 (common bell) was won internally, the small role 4 (common bell) was internally won during the navigation period. In this case, it is preferable to perform the operation navigation at least once (for example, the first time). This is to ensure fairness during favorable navigation periods.

  Further, in the above embodiment (fourth embodiment), when the operation navigation for the specified number of times is executed, the navigation generation state is terminated, that is, the navigation is generated for the internal winning of the small role 3 (push order bell). Although the state is ended, the navigation generation state is ended when the maximum number of times of operation navigation is executed including not only the small part 3 (push order bell) but also the internal winning of the small part 4 (common bell) (Modification 4). Here, the maximum specified number of times means the maximum value of the specified number of times given in the specified number of lotteries, and is 3 in the navigation generation state 1 (RT1-2) of the above embodiment (fourth embodiment) ( FIG. 57 (a)).

  When the operation navigation exceeding the maximum specified number of times is executed in the navigation generation state 1 of the above embodiment (fourth embodiment), the player determines the small role 4 (common) from the execution number of the operation navigation and the maximum specified number of times. This is because it is possible to grasp the number of internal winnings of (Bell). On the other hand, in the modified example 4, since the operation navigation can be executed only up to the maximum specified number of times, that is, up to three times, it is difficult to grasp the number of internal winnings of the small role 4 (common bell). In this case, for the purpose of the navigation generation state, in the navigation generation state 1, it is a condition that the operation navigation for the internal winning of the small role 3 (push order bell) is executed at least once. This is to ensure fairness during favorable navigation periods.

  FIG. 73 is a time chart showing an operation outline of the slot machine 1100 in the navigation period of the fourth modification. Here, in the example shown in FIG. 73, since the specified number of times is 3, when the operation navigation for the internal winning of the small combination 3 (push order bell) and the small combination 4 (common bell) is executed three times, the navigation generation state 1 is finish. That is, in this case, in the second game, the third game, and the fourth game in the navigation period, since either the small role 3 or the small role 4 is internally won, the navigation generation state 1 ends in four games. Note that the value of the operation navigation counter of the fourth modification is subtracted for the execution of the operation navigation for the internal winning of either the small role 3 (push order bell) or the small role 4 (common bell).

  Moreover, in the modified example 4, when the maximum number of times of operation navigation is executed in the navigation generation state 1, the navigation generation state 1 is terminated, but the navigation generation state 1 is not terminated, and the production is changed by changing the production. The player may be caused to have the illusion that 1 is completed (Modification 5). That is, the exit condition of the navigation generation state 1 is the same as in the above-described embodiment (fourth embodiment), when the number of executions of the operation navigation reaches a specified number (only the internal winning of the small role 3 (push order bell)). The target). Also in this case, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp the number of internal winnings of the small role 4 (common bell).

  FIG. 74 is a time chart showing an outline of the operation of the slot machine 1100 in the navigation period of the fifth modification. In the navigation generation state 1 (RT1-2), as shown in FIG. 74, the effect of the navigation generation state 1 is initially executed. However, in the fourth game of the navigation generation state 1, the operation navigation has been executed three times. Therefore, the effect in the navigation generation state 2 is executed from the fourth game in the navigation generation state 1. Thereby, it is possible to make the player have the illusion of shifting to the navigation generation state 2 (RT1-3). When the navigation generation state 1 (RT1-2) ends (specifically, the Nth game in the navigation generation state shown in FIG. 74), the effect in the navigation generation state 2 ends. Preferably, a single-digit numerical value (for example, 1, 2, 3, etc.) may be provided in addition to the numerical value shown in FIG. 57 (b) for the prescribed number of times of the navigation generation state 2 (RT1-3). The number of internal winnings of the small role 4 (common bell) can be made even more difficult.

  It should be noted that the timing of effect change may be the digestion of the prescribed number of games in addition to the case where the maximum prescribed number of operation navigations is executed. For example, in the case where the prescribed number of games is set to 10 games, when 10 games are digested in the navigation generation state 1 (RT1-2), the effects in the navigation generation state 1 (RT1-2) are terminated, and 11 games in the navigation generation state 1 are completed. An effect of navigation generation state 2 (RT1-3) is started from the eyes.

-Battle effect In addition, the slot machine 1100 executes a battle effect in a game in which a small combination 3 (push order bell) or a small combination 4 (common bell) in the navigation generation state 1 (RT1-2) is internally won. (Modification 6). The battle effect is an effect that informs whether or not the navigation generation state 1 is ended or not in the game based on the battle result. Specifically, the navigation generation state 1 is continued when the hero character confronts the enemy character and wins, and the navigation generation state 1 is ended when defeated. The battle effect is started based on the start lever operation, and the battle result is notified based on the third stop operation. In the battle effect, in addition to displaying the battle image d30 on the liquid crystal display device 1157, the battle sound is output using the speakers 1272 and 1277, and the light of the battle effect is emitted using the various lamps 1420. In the battle production, when the main character wins, a battle victory image d30S indicating that the main character has won is displayed. Display on the device 1157.

  Further, the slot machine 1100 determines whether or not a stop operation according to the notification content of the operation navigation is performed in the game that executes the operation navigation, and when the stop operation according to the notification content is performed, the notification content If the operation success image d10S (for example, a word image such as “success”) is displayed and a stop operation that does not follow the notification content is performed, an operation failure image d10F that indicates that the notification content was not followed (For example, a word image such as “failure”) is displayed. In the modified example 6, regardless of whether the winning combination is won or not, the operation according to the notification content of the operation navigation is “success operation”, and the stop operation not following the notification content of the operation navigation is “failure operation”. Also called. For example, in a game in which the small role 4 (common bell) is won internally, any stop operation wins the small role 4 (common bell), but the “successful operation” is performed according to the notification content of the operation navigation The operation success image d10S is displayed, and when the “failure operation” is performed without following the notification content of the operation navigation, the operation failure image d10F is displayed.

  In the modified example 6, the battle effect is executed every time in the game in which the small winning combination 3 (push order bell) or the small winning combination 4 (common bell) in the navigation generation state 1 is won internally, but this is not limitative. However, it is not always necessary to execute in a game in which the small winning combination 3 (push order bell) or the small winning combination 4 (common bell) in the navigation generation state 1 is won internally.

  FIG. 75 is a time chart relating to the effect of the game in which the last operation navigation is executed in the navigation generation state 1 of the sixth modification. FIG. 75 (a) shows a case where a correct operation according to the notification content is performed and the small role 3 (push order bell) is won, and FIG. 75 (b) shows an incorrect operation that does not follow the notification content. This shows a case where the small role 3 (Push order bell) was not won. Note that since the correct operation order in the game shown in FIG. 75 is “right middle left”, the notification content of the operation navigation is “right middle left”.

  When the correct operation is performed according to the notification content, the slot machine 1100 simultaneously displays the operation success image d10S and the battle defeat image d30F at the time point t1D of the third stop operation, as shown in FIG. 75 (a). Display on the same screen. As a result, the player can grasp that the navigation generation state 1 ends together with the small role 3 (push order bell) winning. In this case, the operation success image d10S and the battle defeat image d30F, which are opposite in terms of contents, are started to be executed simultaneously. If the battle defeat image d30F is displayed after the operation success image d10S is displayed first instead of simultaneously, and the notification is made in the order of success and failure in time series, the meaning of the notification order (operation success) This means that it may be difficult to understand the content.

  On the other hand, when an incorrect operation is performed without following the notification content, the slot machine 1100 fails in operation at the time t1C of the second stop operation, which is a failed operation, as shown in FIG. 75 (b). The image d10F is displayed, and then the battle defeat image d30F is displayed at the time point t1D of the third stop operation. In this case, since both performances are unfortunate notifications to the player, the player will not be confused even if the notifications are given in chronological order. As a result, the player grasps that the navigation generation state 1 ends together with the small role 3 (push order bell) non-winning.

  In the modified example 6, when the small combination 3 (push order bell) is internally won and the operation is failed, the operation failure image d10F is displayed at the time of the failure operation. In this case, the operation failure image d10F may not be displayed. The notification mode of the operation failure image d10F is the same as the operation failure image d10F that is displayed when an operation that does not follow the notification of the operation navigation is performed when a small role 4 (common bell) described later is internally won. This is a notification mode (see FIG. 76 (b)). This is so that it is not possible to grasp whether the small winning combination 3 (push order bell) or the small winning combination 4 (common bell) is won internally at the time of the failure operation.

  FIG. 76 is a time chart of the game in which the operation navigation is executed for the internal winning of the small role 4 (common bell) in the navigation generation state 1 of the modified example 6. FIG. 76 (a) shows a case where a stop operation according to the notification content of the operation navigation is performed and the small role 4 (common bell) is won, and FIG. 76 (b) shows a stop operation not following the notification content of the operation navigation. In this case, the winning combination of the small role 4 (common bell) is shown. Note that the notification content of the operation navigation in the game shown in FIG. 76 is “right middle left”.

  When the stop operation according to the notification content of the operation navigation is performed, the slot machine 1100, as shown in FIG. 76 (a), at the time t1D of the third stop operation, the successful operation image d10S and the battle victory The image d30S is simultaneously displayed on the same screen. As a result, the player can grasp that the navigation generation state 1 continues with the small role 4 (common bell) winning.

  On the other hand, when a stop operation that does not follow the notification content of the operation navigation is performed, the slot machine 1100 operates at the time t1C of the second stop operation, which is a failed operation, as shown in FIG. The failure image d10F is displayed, and then the battle victory image d30F is displayed at the time point t1D of the third stop operation. As a result, the player can accurately grasp that the navigation generation state 1 continues with the small role 4 (common bell) winning.

  In addition, in the modified example 6 shown in FIG. 75A, when the correct stop operation is performed in the game in which the last operation navigation is performed, the operation success image d10S and the battle defeat image d30F are simultaneously displayed on the same screen. However, if the player is not confused, the operation success image d10S and the battle defeat image d30F may be displayed at different timings (Modification 6-1).

  FIG. 77 (a) shows a case where the correct operation is performed and a winning combination 3 (push order bell) is won in the game in which the last operation navigation of the modified example 6-1 is executed, and FIG. In the game which executed the last operation navigation of Example 6-1, it is a time chart when an incorrect answer operation is performed and a small role 3 (push order bell) is not won. Note that since the correct operation order in the game shown in FIG. 77 is “right middle left”, the notification content of the operation navigation is “right middle left”.

  When the correct operation is performed according to the notification content of the operation navigation, the slot machine 1100 displays the operation success image d10S at the time point t1D of the third stop operation as shown in FIG. At time t1E after erasing the image d10S, the battle defeat image d30F is displayed. Note that the player may feel uncomfortable if there is a display of the battle defeat image d30F despite the successful operation. Therefore, at the time t1D of the third stop operation where display of the battle image is started at the time t1A of the start lever operation before the operation result display (display of the operation success image d10S) is present, and the operation success image d10S is displayed. Continues displaying the battle image, and displays the battle defeat image d30F at time t1E when the operation success image d10S is not displayed. By such display, the battle image only displays images of a predetermined story sequentially, and an impression that the display content of the battle image and the result of the player's operation are not related can be given. . That is, the player can recognize that the navigation generation state ends based on a result different from the result of the stop operation.

  On the other hand, when an incorrect operation is performed without following the notification content of the operation navigation, the slot machine 1100, as shown in FIG. 77 (b), at the time t1C of the second stop operation that is a failed operation. The operation failure image d10F for the operation navigation is displayed, and then the battle defeat image d30F is displayed at time t1E after the operation failure image d10F is deleted. The same applies when the failure operation occurs at the time t1B of the first stop operation. That is, in this case, the same operation as that of Modification 6 is performed.

  Note that the player may misunderstand that the battle defeat image d30F is displayed due to the failure operation. Therefore, at the time t1C of the second stop operation that starts displaying the battle image at the time t1A of the start lever operation before displaying the operation result (display of the operation success image d10S), and displays the operation failure image d10F. Continues displaying the battle image, continues displaying the battle image at the time point t1D of the third stop operation, and displays the battle defeat image d30F at the time point t1E when the operation failure image d10F is not displayed. With such a display, the battle image only displays images of a predetermined story sequentially, and gives an impression that the display content of the battle image is not related to the result of the player's operation.

  Similarly, in the modified example 6 shown in FIG. 76 (a), when a stop operation is performed according to the notification content of the operation navigation and the small role 4 (common bell) is won, the operation success image d10S and the battle are displayed. The winning image d30S is displayed on the same screen at the same time (see FIG. 76 (a)), but when the stop operation is performed according to the notification content of the operation navigation and the small role 4 (common bell) is won, the operation is performed. The success image d10S and the battle victory image d30S may be displayed at different timings (Modification 6-2).

  FIG. 78 is a time chart of the game in which the operation navigation is executed for the internal winning of the small role 4 (common bell) in the navigation generation state 1 of the modified example 6-2. FIG. 78 (a) shows a stop operation that does not follow the notification content of the operation navigation, when FIG. 78 (b) wins the small role 4 (common bell) by performing the stop operation according to the notification content of the operation navigation. In this case, the winning combination of the small role 4 (common bell) is shown. Note that the notification content of the operation navigation in the game shown in FIG. 78 is “right middle left”.

  When the stop operation according to the notification content of the operation navigation is performed, the slot machine 1100 displays the operation success image d10S at the time point t1D of the third stop operation as shown in FIG. The battle victory image d30S is displayed at time t1E after the success image d10S is erased. The player can recognize that the navigation generation state continues based on a result different from the result of the stop operation.

  Note that the player may misunderstand that the battle victory image d30S has been displayed due to a successful operation. Therefore, at the time t1D of the third stop operation where display of the battle image is started at the time t1A of the start lever operation before the operation result display (display of the operation success image d10S) is present, and the operation success image d10S is displayed. Continues displaying the battle image, and displays the battle victory image d30S at time t1E when the operation success image d10S is not displayed. With such a display, the battle image only displays images of a predetermined story sequentially, and gives an impression that the display content of the battle image is not related to the result of the player's operation.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 78 (b), the slot machine 1100, when the stop operation not following the notification content of the operation navigation is performed, at the time t1C of the second stop operation, which is a failure operation, is performed. The operation failure image d10F is displayed, and then the battle victory image d30S is displayed at time t1E after the operation failure image d10F is deleted. The same applies when the failure operation occurs at the time t1B of the first stop operation. That is, in this case, the same operation as that of Modification 6 is performed.

  Note that the player may feel uncomfortable if the battle victory image d30S is displayed despite the failure operation. Therefore, at the time t1C of the second stop operation that starts displaying the battle image at the time t1A of the start lever operation before the display of the operation result (display of the operation failure image d10F), and displays the operation failure image d10F. Continues displaying the battle image, continues displaying the battle image at the time point t1D of the third stop operation, and displays the battle victory image d30S at the time point t1E when the operation failure image d10F is not displayed. With such a display, the battle image only displays images of a predetermined story sequentially, and gives an impression that the display content of the battle image is not related to the result of the player's operation.

Moreover, in the modification 6, the execution of the battle effect was started based on the start lever operation, but the trigger for starting the battle effect is not limited to this. For example, a battle scene effect may be executed after the operation navigation effect ends (Modification 6-3).
FIG. 79 and FIG. 80 are time charts showing the flow of operation navigation and battle effects of Modification 6-3. Specifically, FIG. 79 (a) shows that, in the game in which the last operation navigation in the navigation generation state 1 is executed, the correct operation according to the notification content is performed and the small role 3 (push order bell) is won. FIG. 79 (b) shows a case where, in the game in which the last operation navigation is executed, an incorrect operation that does not follow the notification content is performed and the small role 3 (push order bell) is not won, FIG. 80 (a) In the game in which the operation navigation is executed with respect to the internal winning of the small role 4 (common bell) in the navigation generation state 1, the stop operation is performed according to the notification content of the operation navigation and the small role 4 (common bell) is When winning, FIG. 80 (b) shows that in the game in which the operation navigation is executed with respect to the internal winning of the small role 4 (common bell) in the navigation generation state 1, a stop operation that does not follow the notification content of the operation navigation is performed. This shows a case where a small role 4 (common bell) is won. Note that the notification content of the operation navigation in the game shown in FIGS. 79 and 80 is “middle right”.

  When the stop operation according to the notification content of the operation navigation is performed, the slot machine 1100, as shown in FIGS. 79 (a) and 80 (a), succeeds in the operation at the time point t1D of the third stop operation. The image d10S is displayed, and at the subsequent time point t1E, the display of the battle effect image d30 is started, and the battle failure image d30F or the battle victory image d30S operation failure image d10F is displayed as the ending result.

  Since the player may perform a successful operation, there may be a case where a battle victory image d30S is displayed and a case where a battle defeat image d30F is displayed. Therefore, the display of the battle image d30 is started at the time point t1E when the operation success image d10S is not displayed without starting the display of the battle image at the time point t1D of the third stop operation. That is, the display of the battle image d30 is not started immediately after the stop operation is performed, thereby giving the impression that the display content of the battle image is not related to the result of the player's operation.

  On the other hand, when a stop operation that does not follow the notification content of the operation navigation is performed, the slot machine 1100 performs the second stop operation that does not follow the notification content, as shown in FIGS. 79 (b) and 80 (b). At time t1C, the operation failure image d10F is displayed, and at time t1E after the time t1D of the third stop operation, display of the battle effect image d30 is started, and as a result, the battle failure image d30F or the battle victory image d30S operation failure occurs. The image d10F is displayed.

  It should be noted that the player may have a sense of discomfort because there is a case where the battle victory image d30S is displayed and a battle defeat image d30F is displayed after performing the failure operation. Therefore, the display of the battle image d30 is started at the time point t1E when the operation failure image d10F is not displayed without starting the display of the battle image at the time point t1C of the second stop operation (or the time point t1B of the first stop operation). . That is, the display of the battle image d30 is not started immediately after the stop operation is performed, thereby giving the impression that the display content of the battle image is not related to the result of the player's operation.

  FIG. 81 is a time chart showing the lighting timing of the navigation generation state lamp 1190 in Modification 6-3. FIG. 81 (a) shows a case where the correct operation is performed and a winning combination 3 (push order bell) is won in the game in which the last operation navigation in the navigation generation state 1 is executed, and FIG. In a game in which the operation navigation is executed for the internal winning of the small role 4 (common bell) in the generated state 1, when the stop operation is performed according to the notification content of the operation navigation and the small role 4 (common bell) is won. Is shown. Note that since the correct operation order in the game shown in FIG. 81 is “right middle left”, the notification content of the operation navigation is “right middle left”.

  When the navigation generation state 1 ends in the game in which the operation navigation is executed, the navigation generation state lamp 1190 is lit until the time t11 when the medal is inserted in the next game, as shown in FIG. That is, in the modified example 6-3, after the battle defeat image d30F that is the end of the battle image d30 is displayed, the navigation generation state lamp 1190 is not lit. If the navigation generation state lamp 1190 is not lit at a timing earlier than the display timing of the battle defeat image d30F, the player can see the end / continuation result of the navigation generation state 1 without looking at the end of the battle image d30. It is because it recognizes.

  On the other hand, when the navigation generation state 1 does not end in the game in which the operation navigation is executed, the navigation generation state lamp 1190 continues to be lit after the time t11 when the medal is inserted in the next game. When the navigation generation state 1 continues, the battle victory image d30S is not limited to the example of displaying at the end of the battle effect, and the battle defeat image d30F is temporarily displayed at the end as shown in FIG. 81 (b). Thereafter, the restored image d30S may be displayed.

  In the modified example 6-3, since the battle effect is executed after the operation navigation is executed, the notification content of the operation navigation in the game in which the operation navigation based on the internal winning of the small role 4 (common bell) is executed. When a stop operation that does not comply is performed, there is a drawback that the player knows that a small role 4 (common bell) has been won internally immediately after the third stop operation (FIG. 80 (b)). reference). This is because even if the operation failure image d10F is displayed, the winning combination 4 (common bell) is won and medals are paid out. Therefore, even if the battle effect is executed after the third stop operation, the battle effect has no substantial meaning.

  Therefore, in such a case, that is, in the game that executes the operation navigation based on the internal winning of the small role 4 (common bell) in the modified example 6-3, the stop operation that does not follow the notification content of the operation navigation When the operation is performed, the battle effect may not be executed after the operation navigation is executed (Modification 6-4).

  FIG. 82 is a time chart showing the flow of operation navigation and battle effects of Modification 6-4. Specifically, FIG. 82 (a) shows that in the game in which the operation navigation is executed for the internal winning of the small role 4 (common bell) in the navigation generation state 1, the stop operation according to the notification content of the operation navigation is performed. When winning a small role 4 (common bell), FIG. 82 (b) shows the notification contents of the operation navigation in the game in which the operation navigation is executed for the internal winning of the small role 4 (common bell) in the navigation generation state 1. The case where the stop operation which does not obey is performed and the small role 4 (common bell) is won is shown. Note that the notification content of the operation navigation in the game shown in FIG. 82 is “right middle left”.

  When the stop operation according to the notification content of the operation navigation is performed, the slot machine 1100 executes the battle effect after executing the operation navigation as shown in FIG. That is, in this case, the same operation as that of the modified example 6-3 is performed (see FIG. 80A).

  On the other hand, when a stop operation that does not follow the notification content of the operation navigation is performed, the slot machine 1100 does not execute the battle effect after executing the operation navigation, as shown in FIG. That is, the execution of the battle effect is scheduled when the start lever is operated, but if it is determined that there is an operation that does not follow the operation navigation, the execution of the planned battle effect is stopped. Thereby, a useless battle production is not performed.

・ Variation of correct answer operation for small role 3 (push order bell) Also, in the above embodiment (fourth embodiment), when winning a small role 3 (push order bell), the correct answer operation is the first stop operation. From the first to the third stop operation, that is, one of the so-called six-choice operations is set as the correct operation, but the correct operation is set for the first stop operation, that is, the so-called three-choice operation One of the operation contents may be a correct operation (Modification 7). For example, in the case where a small role 3 (push order bell) is won internally, as shown in FIG. 83A, a stop operation (hereinafter abbreviated as “left”) in which the first stop reel is the left reel 1110, the first Any one of a stop operation (hereinafter abbreviated as “middle”) that sets the stop reel as the middle reel 1111 and a stop operation (hereinafter abbreviated as “right”) that sets the first stop reel as the right reel 1112 It may be set as a correct answer stop operation, and the player may win a small role 3 (push order bell) when the correct answer stop operation is performed. However, in the operation navigation of the modified example 7, as shown in FIG. 83 (b), one of the correct operation contents is notified from the so-called 6-option operation sequence. For example, if “Left” is set as the correct stop operation, “Left middle right” or “Left and right middle” is the correct stop operation, so either “Left middle right” or “Left and right middle” will be displayed in the operation navigation. One is to be notified.

  In the above embodiment (fourth embodiment), in a game in which an operation navigation is executed for the internal winning of the small role 3 (push order bell), if the player makes an operation mistake, the small role 3 (push order bell) However, in this modified example 7, even if the player makes an operation mistake, there is a drawback that the internal winning combination is a small role 3 (push order bell). Since there is a case where a small combination 3 (push order bell) may be won, there is an advantage that it is difficult for a player to play when the internal winning combination is a small combination 3 (push order bell).

  FIG. 83 (c) is a time chart showing the flow of operation navigation and battle effects of the seventh modification. More specifically, in a game in which a winning combination is given to the small role 3 (push order bell) in the navigation generation state 1, a stop operation that does not follow the notification content of the operation navigation and a correct stop operation are performed. It is a time chart when winning a prize. Note that the correct answer stop operation in the game shown in FIG. 83C is “right”, and the notification content of the operation navigation is “right middle left”. FIG. 83 (c) follows the gameability of the modified example 6-3 (gameability in which execution of the battle effect is started after the operation navigation is completed).

  As shown in FIG. 83 (c), the player performs the “right / left middle” stop operation, and thus performs the correct stop operation, but does not perform the stop operation according to the notification content of the operation navigation. Therefore, the slot machine 1100 deletes the operation navigation image d10 at the time point t1C of the second stop operation that does not follow the notification content of the operation navigation. When an operation that does not follow the notification content of the operation navigation is performed as described above, the operation navigation image d10 that has been displayed up to that point may be deleted instead of displaying the operation failure image d10F.

  However, since the player has stopped the correct answer, the slot machine 1100 displays a winning image d40 (for example, a word image such as “Get 8”) indicating the small role 3 winning at the time point t1D of the third stopping operation. Display, and start performing the battle effect from time t1E. Note that in the game shown in FIG. 83 (c), the result of the battle effect is victory, and the navigation generation state 1 continues. In this case, the player further plays the small role 4 (common bell) in the game. There is a high possibility of misunderstanding that it was won.

  As described above, when a part of the notification content of the operation navigation includes the correct stop operation, even if the player performs a stop operation that does not follow the notification content of the operation navigation, Since there is a case where a stop operation is performed to win a small role 3 (Pushing order bell), the player has won a small role 3 (Pushing order bell) internally from the winning result or a small role 4 (common bell) I can't guess if I won. That is, in the game in which the operation navigation is executed for the internal winning of the small role 3 (push order bell) and in the game in which the operation navigation is executed for the internal winning of the small role 4 (common bell), When a stop operation that does not follow the notification content is performed, a bell is won and the navigation generation state 1 may continue, so that it becomes more difficult to infer which bell has been won internally.

-Display of the remaining number of operation navigation In the above embodiment (fourth embodiment), which of the small role 3 (push order bell) or small role 4 (common bell) was won internally in the game in which the operation navigation was executed The remaining number of operation navigations was not displayed because the player did not know However, the remaining number of operation navigations may be displayed (Modification 8). However, in the modified example 8, in the state where the navigation is generated, when either the small role 3 (push order bell) or the small role 4 (common bell) is won internally, a lottery (hereinafter referred to as “the specified number of additional lotteries”) Add a specified number of times. This is because, in the game in which the operation navigation is executed, the player cannot grasp which of the small role 3 (push order bell) or the small role 4 (common bell) is won internally. Also, the value of the operation navigation counter is decremented by 1 when either the small combination 3 (push order bell) or the small combination 4 (common bell) is won internally and the operation navigation is executed. In other words, the value of the operation navigation counter matches the remaining number of operation navigations to be displayed.

  FIG. 84A is a time chart showing an operation outline of the slot machine 1100 in the navigation period in the navigation generation state 1 where the specified number of times is 1, in the modification 8. FIG. 84 (b) is a specified number of times lottery table used for the specified number of times lottery at the time of transition to the navigation generation state 1 (RT1-2), and FIG. It is a figure which shows typically the regular times additional lottery table used for a lottery. In the specified number of lotteries, as shown in FIG. 84 (b), one of 1, 2, or 3 is determined by lottery as the specified number of times, and in the specified number of additional lotteries, as shown in FIG. 84 (c). As the number of additions, a value of 0, 1 or 2 is determined by lottery. The specified number of lotteries and the specified number of times additional lottery are lottery processes performed by the main control unit 1300.

  FIG. 84 (a) shows that the third role and the fifth game in the navigation period are internally won by the small role 4 (common bell), and the operation navigation is executed, and the seventh game is internally held by the small role 3 (push order bell). The case where the winning navigation is performed and the operation navigation is executed is shown. In the third game of the navigation period, the additional number of times is determined in the specified number of additional lotteries, and in the fifth and seventh games of the navigation period, the additional number of times of 0 is determined in the specified number of additional lotteries.

  Although the remaining number display is not shown, the operation navigation is not executed in the first game and the second game of the navigation period displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1157, so the value of the operation navigation counter remains at the initial value of 1. Yes, “remaining once” is also displayed in the remaining number display.

  Next, the third game in the navigation period is a game in which a small role 4 (common bell) is internally won and operation navigation is executed. In addition, since two times are determined in the specified number of times additional lottery for the game, the operation navigation command transmitted from the main control unit 1300 to the first sub control unit 1400 includes navigation information indicating the notification content of the operation navigation, and Includes number information indicating the number of additions. As a result, in the remaining number display of the third game in the navigation period, the display transition of “1 time remaining” → “0 time remaining” (1 subtraction because the operation navigation was executed) → “2 times remaining” (additional number added) Is done. On the other hand, the value of the operation navigation counter is set to 2, which is the final remaining number of times.

  As described above, in the operation navigation of the modified example 8, when the remaining number of times is changed, not only the final remaining number is displayed but also the remaining number is displayed with the transition.

  Next, the fifth game in the navigation period is a game in which a small role 4 (common bell) is internally won and operation navigation is executed. In addition, since 0 is determined in the specified number of times additional lottery of the game, the value of the operation navigation counter is set to 1. In the remaining number display of the fifth game in the navigation period, “remaining 2 times” → “remaining 1 "Time" is displayed.

  Next, the seventh game in the navigation period is a game in which a small role 3 (push order bell) is won internally and operation navigation is executed. Since 0 is determined in the specified number of times additional lottery for the game, the value of the operation navigation counter is set to 0. In the remaining number display of the seventh game in the navigation period, “1 remaining” → “0 remaining” Is displayed. Since the value of the operation navigation counter is 0, the navigation period ends in this game, and the navigation generation state 1 (RT1-2) ends.

  According to the modified example 8, the remaining number of operation navigations is displayed, but since it is possible to add the specified number of operation navigations in the game in which the operation navigation is executed, the player can change the operation navigation from the change in the remaining number of operation navigations. It is not possible to determine whether the internal winning combination of the game that executed the navigation is the small combination 3 (push order bell) or the small combination 4 (common bell). That is, it is difficult for the player to grasp the internal winning of the small role 4 (common bell) in the game in which the operation navigation is executed.

-Variation of symbol combination corresponding to small role 4 (common bell) In the above embodiment (fourth embodiment), the symbol combination corresponding to small role 3 (push order bell) and small role 4 (common bell) is used. In all cases, “bell-bell-bell” was used, and the symbol combinations of the small role 3 (push order bell) and the small role 4 (common bell) were made completely the same. However, the symbol combination of the small combination 3 (push order bell) and the small combination 4 (common bell) is not limited to this. For example, the symbol combination corresponding to the small role 3 (push order bell) is “bell-bell-bell”, and the symbol combination corresponding to the small role 4 (common bell) is “bell-bell-bell” and “bell-bell-”. “Replay”, and when winning inside the small role 4 (common bell), if one operation is performed, “bell-bell-bell”, if another operation is performed, “bell-bell-” “Replay” may be arranged on the active line. That is, the stop mode when the small combination 3 (push order bell) wins may not be completely the same as the stop mode when the small combination 4 (common bell) wins.

・ Other game playability It is possible to incorporate various game playability in the game stand. For example, even when the right to execute a navigation period is obtained, a period in which operation navigation may be executed in a game in which the small role 4 (common bell) is won internally, and the small role 4 (common bell) is internal It is good also as the game nature which performs alternately the period when operation navigation is not performed in the winning game. In the latter period, the set value can be easily predicted from the number of winnings of the small role 4. However, the presence of the former period makes it difficult to predict the set value because the latter period can be shortened. be able to.

  Further, even when the right to execute the navigation period is obtained, in the specific period of the navigation period (for example, the period in which special role 1 or special role 2 is internally won), small role 3 (press In the case where the internal winning is in the order bell), the push order navigation may not be executed, and in the case where the internal winning is in the small role 4 (common bell), the push order navigation may be executed. The period in which the special combination 1 or special combination 2 is won internally is generally a period unfavorable to the player (a period in which medals decrease), so the set value is predicted from the number of executions of push order navigation This is because even if it is an easy period, it is a period in which a loss exceeding the profit when the set value can be predicted can be expected. The player does not prefer to prolong this period, but if the period is prolonged because the symbol combination corresponding to special role 1 or special role 2 could not be stopped on the winning line, it is remedy In some cases, it may benefit the player.

-Combination with Modifications A to G of Second Embodiment The above embodiment (fourth embodiment) may be combined with Modifications A and B of the second embodiment. For example, the display of the inserted image d30 may be started at the start of the navigation period, and the display of the inserted image d30 may be ended at the end of the navigation period, that is, the game and the inserted image d30 may be displayed during the navigation period. . In this case, in the situation where the insertion image d30 is displayed, when the small winning combination 3 (push order bell) or the small winning combination 4 (common bell) is won internally, an operation navigation is executed. By displaying the insertion image d30, the operation navigation can be made more conspicuous, and the player's operation mistake can be further reduced. In other words, if the player performs an operation that is not followed during the navigation period, the player can know whether the winning combination is the small role 3 (push order bell) or the small role 4 (common bell). In this case, the possibility that the internal winning combination is grasped can be reduced.

  Moreover, you may combine the said embodiment (4th Embodiment) with the modification C of 2nd Embodiment. For example, when a small combination 3 (push order bell) or small combination 4 (common bell) is internally won during the navigation period, either a large operation navigation that displays a large notification image or a small operation navigation that displays a small notification image May be executed. When the small winning combination 4 (common bell) is won internally, it is preferable that the probability of executing the large operation navigation is slightly higher than when the small winning combination 3 (push order bell) is won internally. The game that won internally in the small role 4 (common bell) is more likely to make the navigation navigation more prominent than the game that won internally in the small role 3 (push order bell). Will be reduced. As a result, an operation mistake is reduced in the game in which the small winning combination 4 (common bell) is internally won, and the winning combination for the player is the small winning combination 3 (push order bell) or the small winning combination 4 (common bell). It is possible to reduce the possibility of being grasped.

  Moreover, you may combine the said embodiment (4th Embodiment) with the modification D of 2nd Embodiment. For example, with the start of the navigation period, the display starts with the lower limit position of “blade” that is the inserted image d30 as the first position (see FIG. 35 (a-2)), and the inserted image d30 continues until the end of the navigation period. When the small combination 3 (push order bell) or small combination 4 (common bell) is won internally in the navigation period, the lower limit position of the “blade” that is the inserted image d30 is set to the second position (FIG. 35). (Refer to (a-3)) (hereinafter referred to as “movement”), or the lower limit position of “blade” that is the inserted image d30 is stopped at the first position (hereinafter referred to as “stop”). You may make it do. Then, when the small winning combination 4 (common bell) is won internally, it is preferable that the probability of executing “move” is slightly higher than when the small winning combination 3 (push order bell) is won internally. The game that won internally in the small role 4 (common bell) is more likely to make the navigation navigation more prominent than the game that won internally in the small role 3 (push order bell). Will be reduced. As a result, an operation mistake is reduced in the game in which the small winning combination 4 (common bell) is internally won, and the winning combination for the player is the small winning combination 3 (push order bell) or the small winning combination 4 (common bell). It is possible to reduce the possibility of being grasped.

  Moreover, you may combine the said embodiment (4th Embodiment) with the modification F of 2nd Embodiment. For example, when the display of the inserted image d30 is started at the start of the navigation period and the inserted image d30 is continuously displayed until the end of the navigation period, a navigation with a longer game period than the navigation generation state 1 (RT1-2) occurs. In the state 2 (RT1-3), the probability that the insertion image d30 having a more prominent color is selected may be slightly higher than that in the navigation generation state 1 (RT1-2). That is, the probability that the inserted image d30 having a more conspicuous color is displayed in a state advantageous to the player may be slightly increased. The player can determine whether or not it is an advantageous state by looking at the color or pattern of the inserted image d30.

<Summary of Embodiment>
As described above, according to the gaming table (for example, the slot machine 100) of the above-described embodiment (for example, the second embodiment), a plurality of reels (for example, reels) that are provided with a plurality of types of symbols and are rotationally driven. 110 to 112), and a plurality of stop operating means (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and operated to individually stop the plurality of rotating reels. And an image display means (for example, effect image display device 157, main control unit 300, first sub control unit 400, second sub control unit 500, etc.) for displaying an image in the image display area. And the said image display means shows the alerting | reporting image (For example, operation specific image d10, d10B of operation condition alerting | reporting effect) which shows the stop operation order of these stop operation means in the said image display area. When the first condition is satisfied (for example, when an internal winning combination is given for the operation order in the AT state, the game display operation such as a start lever operation or a stop operation is performed. The display area of at least a part of the notification image (eg, FIG. 30), and the image display means includes a background image (eg, AT background image d2) in the image display area. ), And the image display means is a means for displaying an insertion image (for example, an insertion image d30 of a state transition suggestion effect) in the image display area, and the insertion image is continuously enlarged and reduced. The display area is changed and the display area is changed (for example, FIGS. 35, 37, 38, etc.). When the second condition is satisfied (for example, in the final game in the AT state) And when the game operation such as a start lever operation or a stop operation is performed), the display area of the inserted image is changed in order to reduce the display area of the background image. When both of the first condition and the second condition are satisfied at the same time (for example, when a start lever operation is performed in the final game in the AT state when an internal winning combination is made) The first basic configuration is means for enlarging the display area of at least a part of the image and changing the display area of the inserted image (for example, FIGS. 36 and 39).

  According to the first basic configuration, when the first condition and the second condition are satisfied, the size of the notification image to be displayed is displayed while the display area of the background image is narrowed by enlarging and reducing the insertion image. Since the notification image is enlarged, the notification image can be conspicuous, and the player can clearly and quickly grasp the content of the notification image. That is, the gaming machine having the first basic configuration is a new gaming machine with improved conventional information display.

  In addition, according to the gaming table (for example, the slot machine 100) of the above-described embodiment (for example, the second embodiment), a plurality of reels (for example, the reels 110 to 112) that are provided with a plurality of types of symbols and are rotationally driven. A plurality of stop operating means (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and operated to individually stop the plurality of rotating reels, and image display An image display means (for example, an effect image display device 157, a main control unit 300, a first sub control unit 400, a second sub control unit 500, etc.) for displaying an image in a region, The image display means displays a notification image (for example, operation specifying images d10 and d10B of the operation condition notification effect) indicating the stop operation order of the plurality of stop operation means in the image display area. Yes, the image display means, when the first condition is satisfied (for example, when a game operation such as a start lever operation or a stop operation is performed in the AT state when the operation order combination is won internally) It is means for enlarging the display area of at least a part of the notification image (for example, FIG. 30), and the image display means displays a background image (for example, AT background image d2) in the image display area. The image display means is a means for displaying an insertion image (for example, an insertion image d30 of a state transition suggestion effect) in the image display area, and the insertion image is continuously enlarged and reduced. This is an image for changing the display area (for example, FIGS. 35, 37, 38, etc.), and the image display means is a star when the second condition is satisfied (for example, in the final game in the AT state). Means for changing the display area of the inserted image in order to reduce the display area of the background image when a game operation such as a lever operation or a stop operation is performed, at the end of the game before the last game in the AT state, etc. And the image display means, when the first condition is satisfied in a period in which the display condition of the insertion image is changed after the second condition is satisfied (for example, the second condition is the final state of the AT state). The first condition is satisfied at the end of the game before the game, and the first condition is established at the time of the start lever in the case of internal winning in the operation order combination in the final game in the AT state), and the display area of the inserted image is changed The second basic configuration is means for enlarging the display area of at least a part of the notification image (for example, FIG. 36, FIG. 39, etc.).

  According to the second basic configuration, when the first condition and the second condition are satisfied, the size of the notification image to be displayed is displayed while the insertion image is enlarged and reduced to narrow the display area of the background image. Since the notification image is enlarged, the notification image can be conspicuous, and the player can clearly and quickly grasp the content of the notification image. That is, the gaming machine having the second basic configuration is a new gaming machine with improved conventional information display.

  In the first basic configuration or the second basic configuration, the image display area is a rectangular area, and the inserted image is an image displayed near the inner edge over the entire circumference of the rectangular area. (For example, FIG. 40A) is the first preferred configuration.

  According to the first preferred configuration, since the impression of narrowing the display area of the background image becomes strong, the notification image can be made more conspicuous.

  In the first basic configuration, the second basic configuration, or the first preferred configuration, the inserted image is a flame that continuously enlarges the display area and partially disappears the display area. It is an image showing the operation of water or smoke (for example, FIG. 38, etc.), which is the second preferred configuration.

  According to the second preferred configuration, since the boundary between the inserted image and the background image becomes ambiguous, a change in the display area of the inserted image can be expressed without a sense of incongruity.

  In addition, according to the gaming table (for example, the slot machine 100) of the above-described embodiment (for example, the second embodiment), a plurality of reels (for example, the reels 110 to 112) that are provided with a plurality of types of symbols and are rotationally driven. A plurality of stop operating means (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and operated to individually stop the plurality of rotating reels, and image display An image display means (for example, an effect image display device 157, a main control unit 300, a first sub control unit 400, a second sub control unit 500, etc.) for displaying an image in a region, The image display means displays a notification image (for example, operation specifying images d10 and d10B of the operation condition notification effect) indicating the stop operation order of the plurality of stop operation means in the image display area. Yes, the notification image includes a first notification image (for example, the operation specifying images d10 and d10B in the lower part of FIG. 42) and a second notification image (for example, the upper part of FIG. 42, which is larger than the first notification image). The operation display images d10, d10B), and in the first case (for example, the production state 1 such as RT2 (AT state), etc.), the image display means While displaying the notification image, in the second case (for example, production state 2 such as RT3 (AT state), etc.), it is means for displaying the second notification image in the image display area. The means is when the first condition is satisfied in the first case (for example, when a game operation such as a start lever operation or a stop operation is performed when an internal winning combination is made in the operation order in the AT state) When the display area of at least a part of the first notification image is enlarged while the first condition is satisfied in the second case, the display of at least a part of the second notification image is displayed. Means for enlarging the area, the image display means is a means for displaying a background image (for example, AT background image d2) in the image display area, and the image display means is an inserted image ( For example, it is a means for displaying an insertion image d30 of the state transition suggestion effect, and the image display means is a game such as a start lever operation or a stop operation in the final game in the AT state, for example, when the second condition is satisfied. When the operation is performed) to enlarge the display area of the inserted image in order to reduce the display area of the background image (for example, FIG. 35), the image display means In the first case, when both the first condition and the second condition are satisfied at the same time (for example, in the case where an internal winning combination is given to the operation order in the final game in the AT state, the start lever operation is performed. The display area of at least a part of the first notification image is enlarged and the display area of the insertion image is enlarged toward the first notification image, while the second notification image is In this case, when both the first condition and the second condition are simultaneously satisfied, the display area of at least a part of the second notification image is enlarged and the second notification image is displayed. The third basic configuration is a means for enlarging the display area of the insertion image (for example, FIG. 43).

  According to the third basic configuration, when the first condition and the second condition are satisfied, the size of the displayed notification image is reduced while the display area of the background image is narrowed by enlarging the insertion image. Since the information is enlarged, the notification image can be made conspicuous, and the player can clearly and quickly grasp the content of the notification image. In addition, since the notification image becomes larger in an advantageous gaming state, the notification image can be made more conspicuous. That is, the gaming machine having the third basic configuration is a new gaming machine with improved conventional information display.

  In addition, according to the gaming table (for example, the slot machine 100) of the above-described embodiment (for example, the second embodiment), a plurality of reels (for example, the reels 110 to 112) that are provided with a plurality of types of symbols and are rotationally driven. A plurality of stop operating means (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and operated to individually stop the plurality of rotating reels, and image display An image display means (for example, an effect image display device 157, a main control unit 300, a first sub control unit 400, a second sub control unit 500, etc.) for displaying an image in a region, In a plurality of gaming states, the image display means displays a notification image indicating the stop operation order of the plurality of stop operation means in the image display area (for example, operation specifying images d10 and d for operation condition notification effects). 0B), and the notification image includes a first notification image (for example, the operation specifying images d10 and d10B in the lower part of FIG. 42) and a second notification image larger than the first notification image. (For example, the operation specifying images d10 and d10B in the upper part of FIG. 42), and the image display means is configured to display the image in the first case (for example, the rendering state 1 such as RT2 (AT state)). While the first notification image is displayed in the display area, the second notification image is displayed in the image display area in the second case (for example, production state 2 such as RT3 (AT state)). The image display means is configured such that when the first condition is satisfied in the first case (for example, in the case of internal winning in the operation order in the AT state, the play such as start lever operation or stop operation). When the operation is performed), the display area of at least a part of the first notification image is enlarged, while the second notification image is satisfied when the first condition is satisfied in the second case. The image display means is a means for displaying a background image (for example, AT background image d2) in the image display area, and the image display means It is means for displaying an insertion image (for example, an insertion image d30 of a state transition suggestion effect) in the image display area, and the image display means starts when the second condition is satisfied (for example, in the final game in the AT state) When a game operation such as a lever operation or a stop operation is performed, at the end of the game before the last game in the AT state, etc.), the display area of the inserted image is reduced to reduce the display area of the background image. Means for enlarging (for example, FIG. 35, etc.), and the image display means is configured to execute the first condition in a period in which the second condition is satisfied and the display area of the inserted image is enlarged in the first case. (For example, the second condition is satisfied at the end of the game before the final game in the AT state, and the first condition is the start lever when the internal order is won for the operation order in the final game in the AT state.) The display area of the inserted image is enlarged and the display area of at least a part of the first notification image is enlarged, while the second condition is used in the second case. And when the first condition is satisfied during a period in which the display area of the insertion image is enlarged, the display area of the insertion image is enlarged and at least a part of the second notification image is displayed. A means for enlarging the display area (e.g., FIG. 43), the fourth basic structure that.

  According to the fourth basic configuration, when the first condition and the second condition are satisfied, the size of the displayed notification image is reduced while the display area of the background image is narrowed by enlarging the insertion image. Since the information is enlarged, the notification image can be made conspicuous, and the player can clearly and quickly grasp the content of the notification image. In addition, since the notification image becomes larger in an advantageous gaming state, the notification image can be made more conspicuous. In other words, the gaming machine having the fourth basic configuration is a new gaming machine with improved conventional information display.

  In the third basic configuration, the image display means displays the second notification image when the first condition and the second condition are satisfied at the same time in the second case. A third preferred configuration is to display the inserted image so as to overlap at least a part of the image (for example, FIGS. 43A and 43C).

  According to the third preferred configuration, when the notification image is displayed large, the notification image is displayed in front of the insertion image, so that the notification image can be made more conspicuous.

  In the fourth basic configuration, the image display means satisfies the first condition in a period in which the second condition is satisfied and the display area of the insertion image is changed in the second case. In such a case, the second notification image is displayed in a manner superimposed on at least a part of the inserted image (for example, FIGS. 43A and 43C). To do.

  According to the fourth preferred configuration, when the notification image is displayed large, the notification image is displayed in front of the insertion image, so that the notification image can be made more conspicuous.

  Further, in the third basic configuration, the fourth basic configuration, the third preferred configuration, or the fourth preferred configuration, the image display means is the image display area in the first case. In the second case, the second notification image is displayed in the image display area with a second shake larger than the first shake. It is a fifth preferred configuration that is a display means (for example, FIGS. 43B and 43D).

  According to the fifth preferred configuration, when the notification image is displayed in a large size, the notification image is greatly shaken, so that the background image can be shown appropriately.

  Further, in the third basic configuration, the fourth basic configuration, the third preferred configuration, the fourth preferred configuration, or the fifth preferred configuration, the insertion image has an enlarged display area. A sixth preferred configuration is an image showing an operation of flame, water, or smoke that continuously disappears a part of the display area.

  According to the sixth preferred configuration, since the boundary between the inserted image and the background image becomes ambiguous, a change in the display area of the inserted image can be expressed without a sense of incongruity.

  In addition, according to the gaming table (for example, the slot machine 100) of the above-described embodiment (for example, the second embodiment), a plurality of reels (for example, the reels 110 to 112) that are provided with a plurality of types of symbols and are rotationally driven. A plurality of stop operating means (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and operated to individually stop the plurality of rotating reels, and image display An image display means (for example, an effect image display device 157, a main control unit 300, a first sub control unit 400, a second sub control unit 500, etc.) for displaying an image in a region, The image display means displays a notification image (for example, operation specifying images d10 and d10B of the operation condition notification effect) indicating the stop operation order of the plurality of stop operation means in the image display area. Yes, the image display means, when the first condition is satisfied (for example, when a game operation such as a start lever operation or a stop operation is performed in the AT state when the operation order combination is won internally) It is means for enlarging the display area of at least a part of the notification image (for example, FIG. 30), and the image display means displays a background image (for example, AT background image d2) in the image display area. The image display means is a means for displaying an insertion image (for example, an insertion image d30 of a state transition suggestion effect) in the image display area, and the image display means is when the second condition is satisfied. (For example, when a game operation such as a start lever operation or a stop operation is performed in the final game in the AT state), the table of the inserted image is displayed to reduce the display area of the background image. Means for enlarging the area, and the inserted image includes a first inserted image that performs a first movement (for example, an inserted image d30 in the lower stage of FIG. 44) and a second movement that is larger than the first movement. A second insertion image (for example, the upper insertion image d30 in FIG. 44), and the image display means is in the first case (for example, the rendering state 1 such as RT2 (AT state), Etc.) while the first insertion image is displayed in the image display area while the second insertion is made in the image display area in the second case (for example, production state 2 such as RT3 (AT state)). An image display unit, wherein the image display unit displays the display area of the first insertion image in order to reduce the display area of the background image when the second condition is satisfied in the first case. While the second place If the second condition is satisfied, the display area of the second insertion image is enlarged in order to reduce the display area of the background image. In the case where both the first condition and the second condition are satisfied at the same time (for example, when the start order is operated in the final game in the AT state when the operation order is won internally) In addition, while expanding the display area of at least a part of the notification image and the display area of the first insertion image, in the second case, the first condition and the second Means for expanding the display area of at least a part of the notification image and expanding the display area of the second insertion image when both of the conditions are satisfied simultaneously (for example, Etc. Figure 44), the fifth basic structure that.

  According to the fifth basic configuration, when the first condition and the second condition are satisfied, the size of the displayed notification image is reduced while the display area of the background image is narrowed by enlarging the insertion image. Since the information is enlarged, the notification image can be made conspicuous, and the player can clearly and quickly grasp the content of the notification image. In addition, in an advantageous gaming state, the amount of movement of the inserted image becomes larger, so that the notification image can be made more noticeable. That is, the gaming machine having the fifth basic configuration is a new gaming machine with improved conventional information display.

  In addition, according to the gaming table (for example, the slot machine 100) of the above-described embodiment (for example, the second embodiment), a plurality of reels (for example, the reels 110 to 112) that are provided with a plurality of types of symbols and are rotationally driven. A plurality of stop operating means (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and operated to individually stop the plurality of rotating reels, and image display An image display means (for example, an effect image display device 157, a main control unit 300, a first sub control unit 400, a second sub control unit 500, etc.) for displaying an image in a region, In a plurality of gaming states, the image display means displays a notification image indicating the stop operation order of the plurality of stop operation means in the image display area (for example, operation specifying images d10 and d for operation condition notification effects). 0B), and the image display means is a game operation such as a start lever operation or a stop operation when the first condition is satisfied (for example, when an internal winning is made in the operation order in the AT state) The display area of at least a part of the notification image (for example, FIG. 30), and the image display means includes a background image (for example, AT) in the image display area. A background image d2), and the image display means is a means for displaying an insertion image (for example, an insertion image d30 of a state transition suggestion effect) in the image display area. When the two conditions are satisfied (for example, when a game operation such as a start lever operation or a stop operation is performed in the final game in the AT state, the game before the final game in the AT state ends. Etc.) for expanding the display area of the insertion image in order to reduce the display area of the background image, and the insertion image is a first insertion image (for example, the lower part of FIG. 44). Inserted image d30) and a second inserted image (for example, the inserted image d30 in the upper stage of FIG. 44) that enables a second movement larger than the first movement, and the image display means In the first case (for example, rendering state 1 such as RT2 (AT state), etc.), the first insertion image is displayed in the image display area, while in the second case (for example, RT3 (AT state)). In the production state 2 etc.), the second display image is displayed in the image display area, and the image display unit is configured to display the second condition when the second condition is satisfied in the first case. Reduce the display area of the background image In order to reduce the display area of the background image when the second condition is satisfied in the second case, the display area of the first insertion image is enlarged to reduce the display area of the background image. The image display means increases the display area of the first insertion image during a period in which the second condition is satisfied and the display area of the first insertion image is expanded. (For example, the second condition is satisfied at the end of the game before the final game in the AT state, and the first condition is the start lever when the internal order is won for the operation order in the final game in the AT state.) The display area of the first insertion image is enlarged and the display area of at least a part of the notification image is enlarged, while the second condition is used in the second case. Is established When the first condition is satisfied during the period of expanding the display area of the second insertion image, the display area of the second insertion image is expanded and at least a part of the notification image The sixth basic configuration is a means for enlarging the display area (for example, FIG. 44).

  According to the sixth basic configuration, when the first condition and the second condition are satisfied, the size of the displayed notification image is reduced while the display area of the background image is narrowed by enlarging the insertion image. Since the information is enlarged, the notification image can be made conspicuous, and the player can clearly and quickly grasp the content of the notification image. In addition, in an advantageous gaming state, the amount of movement of the inserted image becomes larger, so that the notification image can be made more conspicuous. That is, the gaming machine having the sixth basic configuration is a new gaming machine with improved conventional information display.

  Further, in the fifth basic configuration, the image display means displays the notification image in the second case when both the first condition and the second condition are satisfied at the same time. It is a seventh preferred configuration to display the inserted image so as to overlap at least a part of the image (for example, FIG. 45A).

  According to the seventh preferred configuration, when the movement of the insertion image is displayed largely, the notification image is displayed in front of the insertion image, so that the notification image can be made more conspicuous.

  Further, in the sixth basic configuration, the image display means is configured to perform the first display in a period in which the second condition is satisfied and the display area of the second insertion image is enlarged in the second case. In the eighth preferred configuration, when the condition is satisfied, the notification image is displayed so as to overlap before at least a part of the second insertion image.

  According to the eighth preferred configuration, when the movement of the insertion image is displayed largely, the notification image is displayed in front of the insertion image, so that the notification image can be made more conspicuous.

  Further, in the fifth basic configuration, the sixth basic configuration, the seventh preferred configuration, or the eighth preferred configuration, the first inserted image has a color or the second inserted image. The eighth preferred configuration is that the images have different patterns.

  According to the eighth preferred configuration, it is possible to determine whether or not the state is advantageous based on the color or pattern of the inserted image.

  Further, in the fifth basic configuration, the sixth basic configuration, the seventh preferred configuration, the eighth preferred configuration, or the ninth preferred configuration, the inserted image has an enlarged display area. A ninth preferred configuration is an image showing an operation of flame, water, or smoke that continuously disappears a part of the display area.

  According to the ninth preferred configuration, since the boundary between the inserted image and the background image becomes ambiguous, a change in the display area of the inserted image can be expressed without a sense of incongruity.

  In addition, according to the gaming table (for example, the slot machine 100) of the above-described embodiment (for example, the second embodiment), a plurality of reels (for example, the reels 110 to 112) that are provided with a plurality of types of symbols and are rotationally driven. A plurality of stop operating means (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and operated to individually stop the plurality of rotating reels, and image display An image display means (for example, an effect image display device 157, a main control unit 300, a first sub control unit 400, a second sub control unit 500, etc.) for displaying an image in a region, The image display means displays a notification image (for example, operation specifying images d10 and d10B of the operation condition notification effect) indicating the stop operation order of the plurality of stop operation means in the image display area. Yes, the image display means, when the first condition is satisfied (for example, when a game operation such as a start lever operation or a stop operation is performed in the AT state when the operation order combination is won internally) It is means for enlarging the display area of at least a part of the notification image (for example, FIG. 30), and the image display means displays a background image (for example, AT background image d2) in the image display area. The image display means is a means for displaying an insertion image (for example, an insertion image d30 of a state transition suggestion effect) in the image display area, and the image display means is when the second condition is satisfied. (For example, when a game operation such as a start lever operation or a stop operation is performed in the final game in the AT state), the table of the inserted image is displayed to reduce the display area of the background image. Means for enlarging the indicated area, and the inserted image includes a first inserted image having a first color or pattern (for example, an inserted image d30 in the lower part of FIG. 46) and the first color or pattern. A second insertion image having a different second color or pattern (for example, the upper insertion image d30 in FIG. 46), and the image display means is in the first case (for example, RT2 (AT state)) In the second state (for example, the rendering state 2 such as RT3 (AT state)), the image display is performed. A means for displaying the second insertion image in a region, wherein the image display means enlarges the display area of the first insertion image when the second condition is satisfied in the first case. Before in the second case When the second condition is satisfied, the second insertion image is a means for enlarging the display area, and the image display means is configured to display both the first condition and the second condition in the first case. Are established at the same time (for example, when an internal winning combination is made for the operation order in the final game in the AT state and a start lever operation is performed), at least some of the notification images While expanding the display area and the display area of the first insertion image, when both the first condition and the second condition are satisfied at the same time in the second case, A seventh basic configuration is means for enlarging the display area of at least a part of the image and enlarging the display area of the second insertion image (for example, FIG. 46).

  According to the seventh basic configuration, when the first condition and the second condition are satisfied, the size of the displayed notification image is reduced while the display area of the background image is narrowed by enlarging the insertion image. Since the information is enlarged, the notification image can be made conspicuous, and the player can clearly and quickly grasp the content of the notification image. Further, since the color or pattern of the inserted image is different in an advantageous gaming state, the notification image can be made more conspicuous. In other words, the seventh basic configuration of the game machine is a new game machine with improved conventional information display.

  In addition, according to the gaming table (for example, the slot machine 100) of the above-described embodiment (for example, the second embodiment), a plurality of reels (for example, the reels 110 to 112) that are provided with a plurality of types of symbols and are rotationally driven. A plurality of stop operating means (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and operated to individually stop the plurality of rotating reels, and image display An image display means (for example, an effect image display device 157, a main control unit 300, a first sub control unit 400, a second sub control unit 500, etc.) for displaying an image in a region, The image display means displays a notification image (for example, operation specifying images d10 and d10B of the operation condition notification effect) indicating the stop operation order of the plurality of stop operation means in the image display area. Yes, the image display means, when the first condition is satisfied (for example, when a game operation such as a start lever operation or a stop operation is performed in the AT state when the operation order combination is won internally) It is means for enlarging the display area of at least a part of the notification image (for example, FIG. 30), and the image display means displays a background image (for example, AT background image d2) in the image display area. The image display means is a means for displaying an insertion image (for example, an insertion image d30 of a state transition suggestion effect) in the image display area, and the image display means is when the second condition is satisfied. (For example, when a game operation such as a start lever operation or a stop operation is performed in the final game in the AT state, or when the game before the final game in the AT state ends), the background image A means for enlarging a display area of the insertion image in order to reduce a display area, the insertion image being a first insertion image having a first color or pattern (for example, an insertion image d30 in the lower part of FIG. 46); And a second inserted image having a second color or pattern different from the first color or pattern (for example, the inserted image d30 in the upper stage of FIG. 46), and the image display means In the case of (for example, production state 1 such as RT2 (AT state)), the first insertion image is displayed in the image display area, while in the second case (for example, RT3 (AT state)). In the production state 2, etc.), the second display image is displayed in the image display area, and the image display means is configured to display the second condition when the second condition is satisfied in the first case. Display area of one inserted image On the other hand, when the second condition is satisfied in the second case, the display area of the second insertion image is enlarged, and the image display means is the means in the first case. When the first condition is satisfied during the period when the second condition is satisfied and the display area of the first insertion image is expanded (for example, when the internal order is won for the operation order in the final game in the AT state). When the start lever operation is performed), the display area of the first insertion image is enlarged and the display area of at least a part of the notification image is enlarged, while the second case If the first condition is satisfied during a period in which the second condition is satisfied and the display area of the second insertion image is enlarged, the display image of the second insertion image is enlarged and the notification image is No Of a means for enlarging the display area of at least a portion of the image (e.g., FIG. 46), the eighth basic configuration that.

  According to the eighth basic configuration, when the first condition and the second condition are satisfied, the size of the displayed notification image is reduced while the display area of the background image is narrowed by enlarging the insertion image. Since the information is enlarged, the notification image can be made conspicuous, and the player can clearly and quickly grasp the content of the notification image. Further, since the color or pattern of the inserted image is different in an advantageous gaming state, the notification image can be made more conspicuous. That is, the eighth basic configuration of the game machine is a new game machine with improved conventional information display.

  In the seventh basic configuration or the eighth basic configuration, the tenth aspect is that the second insertion image differs from the first insertion image in an operation pattern (for example, movement amount, movement speed, etc.). The preferred configuration is as follows.

  According to the tenth preferred configuration, it is possible to determine whether or not the state is advantageous based on the operation pattern of the inserted image.

  In the seventh basic configuration, the eighth basic configuration, or the tenth preferred configuration, the notification image is a first notification image (for example, the operation specifying image d10, FIG. 47B). d10B) and a second notification image larger than the first notification image (for example, the operation specific images d10 and d10B in FIG. 47A), and the image display means is the first case In the second case, the second notification image is displayed on the image display area, while the first display image is displayed on the image display area. When the first condition is satisfied in the first case, the display area of at least a part of the first notification image is enlarged, while the first condition is satisfied in the second case A small amount of the second notification image And also a means to enlarge the display area of the part of the image, and eleventh preferred configuration that.

  According to the eleventh preferred configuration, in the advantageous gaming state, the notification image becomes larger, so that the notification image can be made more conspicuous.

  Further, in the seventh basic configuration, the eighth basic configuration, the tenth preferred configuration, or the eleventh preferred configuration, the inserted image has an enlarged display area and a part of the display area. A twelfth preferred configuration is an image showing the operation of flame, water, or smoke that continuously disappears.

  According to the twelfth preferred configuration, since the boundary between the inserted image and the background image becomes ambiguous, a change in the display area of the inserted image can be expressed without a sense of incongruity.

[Other game machines]
In the above embodiment, the slot machine 100 using medals (coins) as a game medium is shown as an example of the game table. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The present invention can be applied to slot machines, pachinko machines, arrange ball game machines, jade ball game machines, smart balls, casino machines, and the like as media.

  The slot machine may be a slot machine that only exchanges electronic data without using medals, and the game medium in this case includes electronic data corresponding to medals, The input includes inputting the digitized data from a predetermined external device (electronic storage device), and the payout of the game medium is the conversion of the digitized data to the predetermined external device (electronic storage device). Including output.

  Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and various modifications can be made to the embodiments of the present invention without departing from the gist of the present invention. Such modifications and changes can be made, and those accompanying such modifications and changes are also included in the technical scope of the present invention. Further, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the invention only list the most preferable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what was done.

100 slot machine 110, 111, 112 reel 113 symbol display window 130, 131, 132 medal insertion button 135 start lever 137, 138, 139 stop button 157 effect image display device 272, 277 speaker 300 main control unit 400 first sub control unit 420 Various lamps 500 Second sub-control unit d10 Operation specific image d20 Operation correct image d30 Inserted image d1, d2 Background image

Claims (2)

Three reels which are given multiple types of designs and are driven to rotate,
Start operation means operated to start rotation of the three reels;
And three stop operation means to be operated for the provided corresponding to each of the three reels, to the three rotating reel individually stopped,
Image display means for displaying an image in the image display area;
A game machine equipped with
The image display means is means for displaying a notification image indicating a stop operation order of the three stop operation means in the image display area,
The notification image includes a first stop operation notification image indicating a stop operation means that is operated first, a second stop operation notification image indicating a stop operation means that is operated second, and a stop operation means that is operated last. Three stop operation notification images, and
The image display means is means for displaying a background image in the image display area,
The image display means is means for displaying an insertion image in the image display area,
The image display means is a means for expanding the display area of the insertion image in order to reduce the display area of the background image when displaying the insertion image while displaying a background image in the image display area,
The insertion image includes a first insertion image that performs a first movement, and a second insertion image that enables a second movement larger than the first movement,
The image display means while displaying the first insertion image in the image display area in the first effect state, with means for displaying the second insertion image in the image display area in the second rendition state Yes,
When the image display means displays the first insertion image in the image display area in the first effect state and displays the notification image,
After the operation on the start operation means, the first insertion image and the second stop operation notification image are displayed while the first insertion image and the notification image are displayed separately from each other. And display so as not to overlap any of the third stop operation notification image (hereinafter referred to as the first display mode),
After the operation of the stop operation means indicated by the first stop operation notification image is performed when there is a display of the first display mode, the first stop operation notification image is deleted, and the first of the notification images is The second stop operation notification image is enlarged and the first insertion image is enlarged, and the enlarged second insertion operation notification image and the third stop operation notification image are both enlarged. Display so as not to overlap (hereinafter referred to as the second display mode)
After the operation of the stop operation means indicated by the second stop operation notification image is performed when there is a display of the second display mode, the second stop operation notification image is deleted, and the second stop operation notification image is included in the notification image. Three stop operation notification images are enlarged and the first insertion image is enlarged, and the enlarged first insertion image is displayed so as not to overlap with the enlarged third stop operation notification image (hereinafter, third Means to display), and
The interval between the first insertion image and the second stop operation notification image in the second display mode is the interval between the first insertion image and the first stop operation notification image in the first display mode. Narrower spacing than
The interval between the first insertion image and the third stop operation notification image in the third display mode is larger than the interval between the first insertion image and the second stop operation notification image in the second display mode. Narrow spacing,
When the image display means displays the second insertion image in the image display area in the second effect state and displays the notification image,
After the operation on the start operation means, the second insertion image and the second stop operation notification image are displayed while the second insertion image and the notification image are displayed separately. And the third stop operation notification image so as not to overlap (hereinafter referred to as a fourth display mode),
When there is a display of the fourth display mode, after an operation is performed on the stop operation means indicated by the first stop operation notification image, the first stop operation notification image is erased, and the first stop operation notification image of the notification image is displayed. Enlarging the second stop operation notification image and enlarging the second insertion image, and expanding both the enlarged second insertion image and the second stop operation notification image and the third stop operation notification image Display so as not to overlap (hereinafter referred to as the fifth display mode),
In the case where the display of the fifth display mode is present, after an operation is performed on the stop operation means indicated by the second stop operation notification image, the second stop operation notification image is deleted, and the second stop operation notification image is included in the notification image. Three stop operation notification images are enlarged, the second insertion image is enlarged, and the enlarged second insertion image is displayed so as not to overlap the enlarged third stop operation notification image (hereinafter referred to as sixth Means to display), and
The interval between the second insertion image and the second stop operation notification image in the fifth display mode is the interval between the second insertion image and the first stop operation notification image in the fourth display mode. Narrower spacing than
The interval between the second insertion image and the third stop operation notification image in the sixth display mode is greater than the interval between the second insertion image and the second stop operation notification image in the fifth display mode. Narrow spacing,
A game stand characterized by that. The game table according to claim 1 ,
The inserted image is an image showing the operation of flame, water, or smoke that continuously enlarges the display area and disappears part of the display area.
A game stand characterized by that.